Home

CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide (Version 2.0)

Contents

1. Format Default File storage na i Description Name Extension format bmp bmp 3 x 8 bit RGB Windows bitmap format Only un compressed bitmaps are supported no RLE compression cineon cin 3 x 10 bit RGB 10 bit RGB format Subset of the ANSI SMPTE DPX file format Flexi ble file format by Kodak allowing for variable image headers dpx dpx 3 x 8 bit RGB 8 bit RGB file format SMPTE Stan dard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 3 x 10 bit RGB 10 bit RGB file format SMPTE Stan dard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 10 bit YUV422 10 bit YUV file format SMPTE Stan dard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 3 x 12 bit RGB 12 bit RGB file format SMPTE Stan dard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 4 x 16 bit 16 bit RGB file format with key RGBA SMPTE Standard File Format for dig ital moving picture exchange sgi sgi 3 x 8 bit RGB 8 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX im rgb age format 3 x 16 bit RGB 16 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX im age format tga tga 3 x 8bitRGB Targa image format and 4 x 8 bit RGBA uncom pressed CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide A 8 Table A 1 Supported video file formats cont Format Default File storage cee Description Name Extension format tiff 62 3 x8 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in and 4 x 8 bit 8 bit R
2. 00 6 44 6 4 12 Advanced TriMM Ing sixes nscarcecbmareecansescantsadeeantansscsanas 6 47 6 4 13 Marking Positions in the Timeline s an 6 49 6 4 14 Attaching an Audio Clip to a Video Clip 6 50 6 5 Working with Video Clips eee eee eeeeeeeee 6 53 6 5 1 The Clip s Information ish sssissetnnenerceaserscenestieavirencheniius 6 53 6 5 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips iecsssssvisasstieasearsroavnt 6 54 6 5 3 Consistencies of Clips staieaniasarnthenimaassadsnssecreucnsnnnnan 6 56 6 5 4 Time Stretching or Compression of Video Clips 6 57 6 5 5 Matching an Individual Video Frame nasser 6 58 iii CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 5 6 Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element 6 59 6 5 7 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline 6 61 6 6 Working with Audio CDS s es 6 64 6 6 1 The Clip s Information syatisuntstaoes deeds oe rewswnteeierrecseneiend 6 64 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips ee 6 65 6 6 3 Volume Control lt ccczecten ace sete ectetiradecsssaieeeet chacsatades 6 66 6 6 4 Waveform Display vissivisapasinagecduessdvecessensepieincedeetesanis 6 68 Timeline Element Properties 0 ccceeseeteteeeeeees 7 1 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties eee 7 2 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area nccc 7 3 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields 0 0 7 5 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element P
3. 54 15 01 20 Remove control point _ American_Beauty_Par Match frame Delete 01 835 2 fAudio CSi 0 1 h 6 fAudio Cs Disconnect timeline Enable tooltip Time stretching Figure 6 50 Attaching audio and video clip Once this is done the audio clip will be attached to the selected video clip Now if either one of these clips is selected in the timeline the oth er attached clip will be selected as well and they can then for example be moved easily together while their alignment and relative position to each other is maintained However because attached clips can only be used in the overwrite mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool once clips are attached in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the software switches on the overwrite mode automatically When working with attached clips in the timeline you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore The button to switch be tween the two different modes appears dimmed and is no longer available Further information about the insert and overwrite mode can be found in section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 To activate the insert mode of the CLIPSTER software all time line elements have to be disconnected How to Disconnect Attached Clips To sever an attachment of clips or to switch back to the insert mode of the CLIPSTER software you have to disconnect the attached clips e Select the attached clips or a specific clip of the attac
4. CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs To the right of the check box Audio output the Format combo box can be found From this combo box select the file format for the audio clip to be generated For a list of the supported audio file formats of CLIPSTER please refer to section Supported File Formats on page A 7 Format WAV From the Resolution combo box you have to select the bit depth of the audio files The CLIPSTER Edit Tool supports all common resolutions bit depths Resolution 16 bits Channels Below the area Format the area Stereo 1 2 Stereo 3 4 Channels is located which holds several check boxes for the avail able audio channels You have to use these check boxes to select Siera etl Staran EnS audio channels for the output The stereo channel check boxes of this area are directly related to the audio channel output settings of the timeline see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 14 They will render whatever audio track is set to the respec tive output channels Furthermore the Edit Tool will render one file for each stereo channel that is selected here Stereo 5 6 Stereo 7 8 Stereo 9 10 Stereo 10 12 Example 1 If audio track 1 of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool contains an audio clip out put configuration to channel 1 and 2 while the second track does not output configuration to channel 3 and 4 and you select in the Final izing window the channels 1 2 3 and 4 for an aud
5. 4 16 to process material of a higher resolution or bit depth the real time ca pability of CLIPSTER cannot be ensured The real time capability of CLIPSTER depends on various factors such as frame size play out frequency location of the clip on the storage etc When adding a clip to the bin it will be checked whether its loca tion and or file format are real time capable 7 Additional checks will be performed when adding clips to the i timeline If any exceed the real time capability of the CLIPSTER video system they will be subject for a prerendering see sec tion Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Clips that may cause trouble because of their location and or file format invoke a warning message when added to the bin Then the clip will be visibly marked in the contents area of the bin In the thumbnail view a warning icon will be superimposed on the thumbnail and the respective text information that is the cause for this warning will be colored in yel low This behavior i e the warning message as well as the marking i of a clip in the contents area of the bin can be configured with the setting Warn if base directory mismatch group Gener al in the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more details File format Bitmap File path C FILM4K FILM4kK_0000 Duration 02 01 File format TIFF File path Data rate Duration 30
6. When starting the CLIPSTER software a drop report is as a standard written automatically to the directory 1og available in the installation path of the software only the last ten files will be kept Further information about the log files and the drop reports can be found in section The Performance Monitor on page 4 37 PVs Getting Started 3 2 First Steps in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool This section introduces in a step by step description how to work with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool It will be explained what to do to begin a project how to work with the timeline and how to perform some basic editing tasks Use this tutorial to familiarize yourself with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and the way it has to be handled 3 2 1 Preparing the Bin After starting the CLIPSTER software the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be started automatically In the upper left side of the Edit Tool window you can see the tool area with the bin activated by default Bin Effects Makers Perform title bar e Hie folder area _____ o contents area _____ button area en Figure 3 1 The bin activated in tool area The bin provides initial access to the video material stored on your sys tem In the bin you can find two main areas In the folder area you can make folders and directories to sort your material into This way you can perform a clip and project management In the contents area you can preview the material sort
7. 06 00 041 00 o A transition Sta ples_ Ute fHollywo op Figure 6 39 Transition between clips 6 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS The exact position and length of the transition depends on the available head and tail If head and tail are sufficiently available for both clips the transition will be positioned exactly in the middle of the timeline cursor and it will be of one second length The transition is now added to the timeline and you can proceed for instance by calling up its properties and altering them to adjust the transition to your needs How to do this as well as the individual items available to change a transition are described in chapter Timeline Ele ment Properties on page 7 1 You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from i the timeline Simply select its visual representation in the time line and press the key Del on your keyboard or select from its context menu the menu option Delete Depending on the resolution of the material and the type of operators used in the timeline it may be necessary to prerender the transition Further information about this can be found in section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 6 4 10 Prerendering of Timeline Elements 6 42 When adding timeline elements such as clips or operators to the time line they are immediately tested for their real time capability which de pends on various factors such as frame si
8. Changing the Display Type on page 6 11 Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path Length duration of the clip S i You can receive additional information about the clips via their tooltips which can be customized to your individual needs see section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 11 for further information 6 5 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips The context menu of the video clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with video clips 6 54 Match frame Delete If you want to know the exact position of an indi vidual frame in the source material of the video clip or transfer this image or the complete image se quence to another application for further process ing you can select the menu option Match frame Further information about this feature can be found in section Matching an Individual Video Frame on page 6 58 be found on the context menu of the i The Match frame menu option can also timeline scale This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline z You may also select the clip and press the i Del key on you keyboard to delete a clip from the timeline The Timeline Attach Disconnect ele ment Disconnect group Disconnect timeline Enable tooltip Time stret
9. fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 More information about the handling of proxies in the CLIP STER software can be found in section Using Proxies on page 4 25 2 4 2 Working with Prerendered Data Prerendered files are used when working with clips and operators that are not real time capable A prerendering means that the CLIPSTER Edit Tool calculates the respective clips and operators effects before a play Basics out takes place and stores the calculated extra files images in a loca tion for temporary files on the video hard disks These are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline and on the fly handled operators Depending on your system capabilities all timeline elements i e clips as well as operators such as transitions or color corrections can be sub ject to a prerendering For example when using a true 4K clip 4096 x 3112 without proxies see section Working with Proxies on page 2 11 it will be marked visibly in the timeline that it is not real time capable In order to play it out in real time you will have to prer ender it beforehand and it will be rendered in the format that is current ly set as the video output format The prerendered files carry project specific file names that are generated and administered by the CLIP STER Edit Tool automatically for the currently loaded project You can set the storage location of the p
10. 7 CLIPSTER is able to process several different image files simul i taneously multi threaded I O mode Therefore one bar shown in the chart may represent several file accesses Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the CLIPSTER software it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 4 40 Figure 4 22 Chart of performance monitor At the top left of the chart you can find the value of the last multi threaded operation It details in certain intervals during operation the workload of all threads in percent i e the value of one bar in the chart At the top right of the chart you can find an indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time When operating the system s workload is displayed via blue bars in the chart The bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not necessarily mean that a drop may occur soon It simply shows that all threads of the software were processing continuously at that point of time and that no thread was idle Drops exceed the work load of the system shown in the chart They are displayed as bars in red that are cut at the top e Missing frames on the video hard disk array are not registered by the performance monitor as d
11. Workstation Software CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Introduction Basics Getting Started The Tool Area The Control Area The Timeline Timeline Element Properties The Menus Appendix Index User Guide Version 2 0 for CLIPSTER Edit Tool Version 2 0 Copyright 2006 by DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH Hanover All rights reserved The manuals as well as the soft and or hardware described here and all their constituent parts are protected by copyright Without the express permission of DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH any form of use which goes beyond the narrow bounds prescribed by copyright legislation is prohibited and liable to prosecution This particularly applies to duplication copying translation processing evaluation publishing and storing and or processing in an electronic system Specifications and data may change without notice We offer no guarantee that this documenta tion is correct and or complete In no event shall DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation any special indirect or consequential dam ages and damages resulting from loss of use data or profits or business interruption arising out of the use of or inability to use the hardware software and or manual materials Those parts of this documentation that describe optional software or hardware features usually contain a corresponding note
12. e controls Ze Figure 5 1 The control area With the control area in the edit mode you can see at its top the video overlay which is used to view the video material Below the video over lay a scrub bar of the timeline is available At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located Here you can also find the buttons to switch between the dif ferent overlay modes of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as well as other impor tant buttons All items of the control area are described in detail in the following sections 5 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 1 The Video Overlay With the video overlay you can view the material present in the time line All clips and added operators to the timeline as long as they do not require prerendering can be viewed in real time While working the video overlay will always adjust to your moves on the timeline This provides a total control for your work and you can immediately monitor your progress The video overlay will adapt its layout aspect ratio to the currently set video output raster of the timeline Due to the fact that the output ras ter may have an effect on the video material of the timeline you can use the video overlay to see its output effect immediately For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may get cropped stretched or compressed or scaled according to your settings
13. on page A 7 e Select the Add Clip menu option on the context menu of the bin s contents area This opens a standard dialog window of the operating system for the selection of a file Add Clip x olhavood 00000 yuw z Holhan 0001 yuv z Ho File type Figure 4 8 Dialog window to add a clip to the bin e Select a video or audio file from the list box or enter its name in the entry field File name If the list box does not contain the desired file name make i sure that the correct drive and directory has been selected If you select another file than the first video frame file in a video directory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail a pos sible clip s inpoint will be set accordingly e Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected video or audio clip will then be loaded into the contents area of the bin By repeating the described steps above you can add as many clips to your bin as your project needs The Tool Area Once at least one clip is available in the bin you can start working with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and add the clip to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Content Browser To add clips to the contents area of the bin you can use the Content Browser of the CLIPSTER software It provides nearly the same possibil ities as the usage of a file manager With its help you can view the con tents of yo
14. tion effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 7 This button transfers the value set in the End entry field to the Start entry field from right to left This button exchanges the values between the End and Start entry fields The value of the End entry field will be transferred to the Start entry field and vice versa With this button you can transfer the value set in the Start entry field to the End entry field from left to right End The End entry field indicates in percent the ending point of the transition If adjusted the operator will conclude the transition at an earlier point of its phas es to blend into the receding image If this value is less than the value set in the Start entry field the transition effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 7 As soon as an item of the transition properties is altered its effect is im mediately applied to the selected transition between the two clips Once the transition properties are set you can for example review the transition and evaluate its effect easily with the button REVIEW of the controls see section Controls on page 5 11 7 8 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 6 Properties of a Video Clip Every video clip added to the timeline provides timeline element
15. Figure 6 23 Aspect ratio controls The Output information at the top provides you with details about the currently set video format and its aspect ratio Directly below it you can find the Aspect ratio combo box where you can either select one of the predefined aspect ratios from the provided list or simply enter the desired ratio in the field of the combo box directly You can enter the aspect ratio in any format you like either by typing in a floating point number or its original division formula The cropping will be applied to the video output representation to the right as well as to your video output directly as soon as a predefined aspect ratio is selected or a typed in value is confirmed by pressing the Enter key Notation Floating point or division x y Examples 1 77777778 16 9 With the Hold aspect ratio check box you can lock the aspect ratio selected with the combo box above Then when changes are applied manually to the cropping e g via the entry fields or the sliders the chosen aspect ratio will be maintained To the right you can find a representation of your current video output With the items provided by and positioned around the image you can change the cropping manually Figure 6 24 Manual controls of cropping 6 22 The Timeline To change the cropping manually use for example the available entry fields and type in the desired values The cropping will be applied to the representation as we
16. In this section you can read what to do to administer clips For some of these tasks the context menu of the clips in the contents area is used usually invoked with a right click of the mouse It pro vides different clip related functions such as the adding of a new clip to the contents area of the bin or altering its properties 4 20 The Tool Area Properties Figure 4 14 Context menu of a clip in the bin If the contents area is empty of clips and you call up the con i text menu not all menu options are displayed How to add clips to the contents area of the bin is in detail de scribed in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 7 How to work with proxies in the bin is described in section Us ing Proxies on page 4 25 Selecting Clips Clips can be selected or deselected easily in the contents area of the bin For this perform one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key at the same time Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and after wards holding down the Shift key while click ing the
17. Rotation CE Figure 7 13 The advanced settings items The combo box Filter is connected to the sliders for sharpness setting Aperture and zooming It determines the algorithm that will be used to change the video image content The following settings are available on the list of the combo box Filter Meaning real This filter uses an algorithm without filtering and is ideal when working with light scaling factors only because it results in very sharp pictures If this filter is selected all alter ations will be performed in real time When the Classic filter is used i changes to the sharpness of the im ages have no effect Classic time Timeline Element Properties Filter Meaning Adaptive Filter The Adaptive Filter is the default setting for real time the Zoom Pan operator It provides an optimized filtering for every scaling factor which will result in high end quality pictures without any artefacts This filter is real time capable i e all changes to the sharpness or a zooming can be played out immediately Software Filter With this setting the best possible filter is se rendering lected It provides a software based sophisti cated algorithm for all settings on the operator Zoom Pan However if this fil ter is used the clip has to be prerendered prior to a play out see section Prerender ing of Timeline Elements on page 6
18. The process can also be started manually at any time when the CLIPSTER software is not running see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 14 Exiting the Process Because the defragmentation process is automatically started together with the CLIPSTER software it will be exited with it as well As soon as the user interface of the CLIPSTER software is closed the process will be halted and shut down as well Operation When running the defragmentation process reorganizes the files present on the hard disk array during stand still times of CLIPSTER This Appendix means a defragmentation will not be performed under the following conditions When CLIPSTER performs real time tasks such as play out or record when CLIPSTER is running in slave mode or when CLIPSTER is running with the VTR task mode of the CLIPSTER I O Tool activated If one of the above said is the case no defragmentation will take place After starting the CLIPSTER software the defragmentation process is running in the background of your video workstation It operates in loops at certain intervals Each time it is started it will go through vari ous checkings and phases of defragmentation Whether a defragmen tation has to be performed is indicated by a special assessment that evaluates the fragmentation degree of the clips on the hard disk array Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defragmenting the worst frag
19. You can take a clip directly from the contents area of the bin or 2 you can configure its in and outpoint beforehand via the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and then drag it from the control area to the timeline Both ways will be described in this section Afterwards the length of the timeline will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale length of the timeline s in and outpoint see also section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 es ea ee timeline length 12 15 15 09 12 16 WLY WOO p Figure 6 1 Timeline length indicator When adding a clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure or the menu option Add Clip not all properties can be dis cerned by the CLIPSTER software automatically due to miss ing file header information For example when adding a yuv clip its color space is automatically set to yuv the field mode to Interlaced the color space range to Head etc because this will most likely be the case when using a true YUV file If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the hard disks you have to call them up and change them accordingly During the adding of clips to the timeline the clip will be visible i in the video or audio track of the timeline and it will react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated positioning Further information about the snap ping mode can be found in sectio
20. on page 4 22 The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again A scrub bar to preview and set an inpoint is available in the thumbnail view of the bin only With the button IMAGE you can activate the view of the thumbnails again For the thumbnail view of the contents area there are also text i information available that can be activated and set via the Con figuration Tool as well see above These texts will then appear to the right of the thumbnail as shown in figure 4 13 on page 4 20 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Before you can begin to work with clips in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you have to fill the bin with clips available on the video system There are four ways to fill the bin with clips of either video or audio 1 You can open a standard file manager e g the Windows Explorer and drag and drop the clips either a file within a direc tory or the directory itself to the contents area of the bin 2 you can use the menu option Add Clip on the context menu of the bin s contents area to fill the bin with contents 3 you can use the Content Browser of the CLIPSTER software which provides almost the same features as a drag and drop via a file manager to fill the contents area of the bin or 4 you can capture clips with CLIPSTER via the CLIPSTER I O Tool All these procedures will be explained in this section of Windows Video and audio data should be stored on th
21. status messages 4 38 4 42 table controls 4 38 4 44 timeline marker 4 43 4 44 6 50 G5dee scene 4 45 pipette cecicesusetarareeteinonicnasan 7 28 7 36 placeholder for missing frame 4 39 4 40 6 56 play out 2 12 5 12 5 18 6 27 l 8 connecting the driver 8 29 IN reverse ccecce 5 12 5 17 performance nsss 4 45 4 47 resolving drops gacssacas tarniaacuts 4 48 PIUg iN prosaren naisi 2 5 7 9 Interface ccce 2 5 7 9 POSITION nncserenrases iaie 5 20 of clip 3 8 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 49 prerendering ccteccscsvceseetecees 2 12 6 42 SUNOS S20 doeaacetes nck irn enaa 1 6 data location ccecce 2 14 delete temporary data 8 21 A 14 secondary color correction 7 30 start process ccce 6 43 8 20 preset effect 4 29 4 31 7 14 ADply ririniirisiirinirirerisai 4 31 7 15 Greate ie ciecacedeciwexcdiaseces 4 29 7 15 delet ricsei 4 32 EXPONE aS aa eee 4 33 MpOT nonnnnnnuniniesseessssrrrrrrrrrrne 4 33 load pene ee aeeai 4 33 7 15 eNAM osiicsirinriiristier rensters 4 32 Eo 4 33 7 15 BOM E ET 4 34 preview window 7 28 7 35 7 36 alpha channel s ctssssivitesasindaeen 7 36 previous cutting point cee 5 13 primary color correction 7 9 7 22 Brightness sceizcedstetvactasiiadastennds 7 24 contrast sispniaicncnecexenectaderteosanes 7 24 for secondary color correction 7 29 SAN herriri 7 26 PANNA oc 7 24 7 26 global sett
22. that should undergo a color correction CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Pipette Lock f So 50 00 Figure 7 25 Color mask controls In detail the color mask area provides the following control elements and possibilities Color Wheel The color wheel of the color mask area shows you the selected color vector in a circle The circle contains all colors according to their hue and their saturation HSL color space and all color components are avail able The distance from the circle s center determines the saturation of the respective color A The color distribution in a color wheel is the same as in a vec Li torscope Further information about the vectorscopes as well as on a color wheel can be found in section The Video Scopes on page 5 3 S _B selected color vector softness tolerance not selected _ 5 Figure 7 26 Color wheel of the color mask area 7 32 Timeline Element Properties While the selected color vector is displayed in a light grey the colors not selected are shown in a darker grey The blue grey surrounding the vec tor marks the softness tolerance of the selected color vector i e the colors lying in this area will be selected as well but a color correction will only be performed on them on a percentage basis This percentage basis is calculated from their distance from the selected color vector meaning when a value is near the selected color vector
23. the viewing settings of the tool the timeline and the control area the output settings as well as the project related configuration settings made in the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software zn The VTR task mode of the CLIPSTER I O Tool that is optionally i available uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the CLIPSTER software Further information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide S 8 2 6 Save As BEZ The standard dialog window to save a file will open after the selection of the menu option Save As This menu option allows to save a project file under a different name Further information about the sav ing procedure itself can be found in section Save on page 8 6 available uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the CLIPSTER software Further information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide iJ The VTR task mode of the CLIPSTER I O Tool that is optionally gt 8 2 7 Update CineReel Update CineRieel The DVS CineReel is a transportable outdoor proof hard disk array es pecially designed for the on set use of digital film capturing The film 8 6 The Menus material is directly stored on the hard disk array and when finished the array can be disconnected and transported to an editing site while the crew continues to capture on the set with an empty DVS CineReel On the editing
24. without laboriously configuring the effects operator anew Fur ther information about this can be found in section Effects on page 4 28 To the left of the properties area you can also set the duration of the clip selected in the timeline area Simply type in its dura tion in timecode frame notation and confirm it with the Enter key CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 3 Exiting the Program To end the current CLIPSTER Edit Tool session perform the following There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the AN Edit Tool the whole CLIPSTER software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or play out operation beforehand Otherwise the re spective task may get interrupted e Select the option Exit on the Project menu or press the key combi nation Alt F4 alternatively es You may also use the menu option Exit of the CLIPSTER i icon on the menu bar of the user interface see section Ex it on page 8 2 The CLIPSTER software will be closed and you can then for instance shut down the video system When exiting the CLIPSTER software a DVS information file is i as a standard written automatically to the directory log avail able in the installation path of the software only the last ten files will be kept Further information about the log files and the DVS information file can be found in section The Perfor mance Monitor on page 4 3
25. 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips of CIPS c 00sersssesneenenen 6 11 62 5 Changing the Display Type ssecccsisc2sassaeteedeckietencss dice 6 11 6 2 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output 6 12 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations c cccccccscsesssccaecceviecnicentis 6 17 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File lecce 6 18 6 2 9 Cropping the Timeline eseeessssesssnnnnnrnrrrrereesresssnnn 6 20 6 2 10 Naming Tracks vais2dticccctsin92sp8iesdasadiceeets Guadiegdaeacdas nni 6 24 6 3 Controlling the Timeline i 10cs 01 62tctieecieeersececeeenieetns 6 25 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline s c 6 25 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline 0 6 28 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General 6 31 6 4 1 The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline 6 32 6 4 2 Muting and Locking Tracks 6 34 6 4 3 Moving Clips within the Timeline sccciscctoiinctesteaniinann 6 35 644 Selecting C PS cxshacieiccenseins cederccoteeais hak eaeteeaceeniaeed ss 6 36 6 4 5 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips eee 6 37 6 4 6 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline 6 37 6 4 7 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range 6 39 6 4 8 Performing a Cut onde scecscech chnsatsecsstatvescesteeneneceaeznagheet 6 40 6 4 9 Setting Transitions acc 6 41 6 4 10 Prerendering of Timeline Elements 2 0 ssis20seeteenten 6 42 6 4 11 Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips
26. 36 LOCK sirrin eeerer nee eer eee 6 34 table ccecce 4 35 move Within ccecce 6 25 timeline scale aa 6 25 M TE eee eer rene perere eer erer ers es 6 34 configuration eee 6 10 NCW scgivecesericdesuaccethcaatee sn taeiedecs 8 3 title bar paste clips dnseeacecarestcmanesseencan 6 37 DiN pieneen 4 4 4 5 4 18 play carciriastiecieianneioonaie 5 12 context menu bin ceccticsaters wees 4 5 properties of video clips 2 5 6 55 effects pane eerren 4 34 ROC Nie sccssecseiccusccasacassssea sacs 6 36 title safety areas oeeie 5 2 redo Rae aa ee ne en 8 23 Kole alea sissiirrieanriieiinnaka 2 7 4 1 reverse play ccecce 5 12 change SIZE 2 2c2shicsedectveddevesscens 4 3 SAVE opopona aiglaeclseatetaucoute 8 6 taD ore ra ee i ENS 4 1 selecting clips o n 6 367 OOS rosoisia carini 4 1 time stretching compression 6 55 tools and services acce 2 4 6 57 defragmentation 2 4 A 12 timeline marker ccecce 6 49 tooltip 6 11 6 54 6 55 6 65 6 66 tooltip 6 54 6 55 6 65 6 66 configuration sessen 6 11 tooltip configuration 6 11 track ats canara meen TE 8 23 ke1 E ET 6 34 vertical editing ceecee 6 61 MUTE ciesccessenerstadussineiiescdarancen 6 34 yellow line sace 6 43 8 21 NAME aioi ee eee oiai sE 6 24 ZOOM nosire 3 9 5 9 6 26 track buttons scese 3 10 6 34 timeline area lcner 2 7 track size change size ccecce 4 3 manual setting ecce 6 8 S ZE periei ERTER TEENS 6 6 OPUONS seeisiraaraiiiei itiren 6 7
27. 42 With the Aperture items to the right of the Filter combo box you can sharpen or blur the image The slider and its entry field to the right find their main usage when Moir effects occur in your images Moir ef fects are interferences in your video output signal usually caused by fine black and white image details in your video clip such as striped or checked patterns If such interferences in your output occur use the slider and pull it to the left or right until the jittering or other interfer ences disappear Slider Slider Position Result Factor or Factor Range left blur lt 1 Aperture middle original image 0 right sharpen gt 1 e To use the Aperture slider the combo box Filter has to be set to the Adaptive Filter or Software Filter With the Rotation slider and its entry field at the bottom of the settings pane you can rotate the clip full circle 180 By dragging the slider to the left or entering a negative value in the entry field you can rotate the CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DvS 7 20 image counter clockwise and by dragging the slider to the right or en tering positive values you can rotate the image clockwise l Slider Entry Field Slider ovement Rotation Values left negative Rotation right positive out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on G If a clip is rotated the cl
28. 6 42 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 2 5 Notes on Project Management To display material of a very high resolution or to enable a real time play out of some operators e g the secondary color correction CLIP STER may create proxies as well as prerendered files Both ways to maintain a real time workflow are based on the same principle They use calculated extra files to either enable a play out prerendering or make your working environment more comfortable proxy generation For further information about proxies or prerendering see sec tion Working in Real Time on page 2 11 amp The locations where these extra files are stored are saved project spe cificin the project file i e each project file can have different directories for the proxy and or prerendered data and the exact locations will be stored together with the project file Therefore it is suggested when working with proxies or prerended material to configure each project to directories of its own where these files will be stored DVS recom mends when working with different projects to create for each project a project specific directory on your video hard disk array where to store the project file Beneath it create subdirectories for the additional data Ve _ lt project specific directory gt lt temporary data directory gt lt proxy data directory gt lt project file gt cp This structure guarantees a clear and
29. 6 66 WaVeTOIM o cececseeeee eee 5 16 6 68 audio CUD acre tin sicieieivedecaieaes 6 64 A 1 attach to video 6 50 6 55 6 66 change length cen 6 46 6 47 delete volume control point 6 65 file number display type 6 65 thumbnail eccriene 4 14 WOME sriritiiviericirinirinena 6 66 volume control line nace 6 67 volume control point 6 67 waveform display 5 16 6 68 audio OPTIONS eect eee e eee 6 17 Audio Scrubbing se seed estos resected 6 17 audio track 3 8 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 64 button 00 cee eec eee eeee eee eee 3 10 6 34 VG sees pissisten 6 6 JOCK gectesssaiaatettatessicaiecssianadiess 6 34 GUS estes asco octet 6 34 NAME piniienn aiaiai 6 24 HUMDEP iiseiitisakii riisin 6 7 l 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Propert ES seien ents 6 14 POUNG secc 6 14 S ZE aGasdeaieceaeiaseavesdeeuleeceuseeacaads 6 7 size manual setting 06 6 8 AULOCONFOMMING o s 6 63 AULOSAVE ou ee eeeeeee seen 2 4 8 3 8 30 prerendering cinscecscdesennmnnerexetcess 1 6 autoscaling sscsesacetau 3 10 6 13 8 17 B back p soreer isi eseina 8 3 backup file n 8 6 base video directory ccce 4 17 DIR eee cosas be cee ce oeeteeeecea 3 3 4 4 A 1 add Clip siccmstesciesauscenaentee 3 4 4 7 bin clip play sietorseseterenceexsenince 5 18 bin clip reverse play 111 5 17 change layout ys eters 4 5 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 24 8 25 GIO ED E eee cet cede eet et
30. Anyway a lack of this note does not mean any commitment from DVS GmbH Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorpo rated in the United States and or other countries CLIPSTER is a registered trademark of DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH Kodak and Cineon are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company IRIX and SGI are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics Inc Windows the Windows logo and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Any other product names mentioned in this documentation may be trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners and as such are subject to the usual statutory provisions PVs Headquarters DVS Digital Video Systems GmbH Krepenstr 8 30165 Hannover GERMANY Phone 49 511 67807 0 Fax 49 511 630070 E mail info dvs de Internet http www dvs de Support Phone 49 511 67807 25 Fax 49 511 67807 31 E mail support dvs de For the Americas U S Headquarters DVS Digital Video Inc 300 East Magnolia Boulevard Suite 102 Burbank CA 91502 USA Phone 1 818 846 3600 Fax 1 818 846 3648 E mail info dvsus com Internet http www dvsus com Support E mail support dvsus com l I Contents I l 1 Introduction cise cs ccdtcocosscasestaavdnencondandatensioaeseocedladaiendnavessetendente 1 1 Met OVEVIEW arriden ena a E
31. Controls on page 5 11 Of course alternatively you can also ad i just the length of an element in the time line directly via its in and or outpoint see section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 7 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 4 Modify before Modify after Modify all This button applies the settings of the currently se lected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type that precede it in this track of the timeline The button MODIFY AFTER applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type that succeed it in this track of the timeline The button MODIFY ALL applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type in this track of the timeline With the RESET button you can restore the default settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator with a single click Effect settings for video clips can also be applied to individual i clips by using preset effects see section Creating and Using Preset Effects on page 4 29 PVs Timeline
32. Each designated line consists of four values RGBA The separation is made via tabulators TAB The LUT file has to provide 1024 input output values as used in 10 bit video mode If you work with 8 bit video data only every fourth value will be used from the LUT You have to define all 1024 values and they have to be in incre menting order The color component values have to be stated as floating point val ues between 0 and 1 After some comments for example about the file and its values the file starts to list the color correction values Each line starts with the desig nation of the input value bit depth succeeded by the four color com ponent values first red second green then blue and last the alpha channel This leads to the following syntax Any comment Any comment lt input value gt lt B gt lt G gt lt R gt lt A gt A finished and complete LUT file has to look like the following value pairs in the middle left out bvs Appendix Any comment Any comment 0 0 009766 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 1 0 011719 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 2 0 013672 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 3 0 015625 0 001953 0 000000 0 0 4 0 017578 0 003906 0 000000 0 0 5 0 019531 0 005859 0 000000 0 50 1022 0 999023 0 988281 0 999023 0 0 1023 0 999023 0 991211 0 999023 0 0 A 5 Slave Mode Control In case you want to control CLIPSTER in slave mode via RS 422 the fol lowing specifications have to be set on the master device to ensu
33. List of thumbnails combo box From this list you can select the view of the video track s i e you can select the way the clips representations are displayed in the video track s For example the clips can be shown with continuous thumb nails in the video track s HOLLYWOOD HOLLYWOOD on Hollywood Figure 6 8 Continuous thumbnails In detail the clips in the video track s can be set to the following ap pearances Selection Meaning No thumbnails The clips representations in a video track of the timeline are shown without thumbnails At start end Thumbnails from the clips are displayed at the start and the end of the clips only e g as shown in figure 6 51 on page 6 53 Continuously All clips in the video track s are filled with thumbnails continuously as shown in the ex ample figure above File names Instead of seeing the thumbnails continuously the clips are filled with their file names instead i e you will see the original file names of the re spective image files throughout the clip which may be especially helpful during frame accu rate editing 6 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale 6 10 The timeline scale can be adapted to the needs of your project You can either set a special offset or switch the notation of the scale timeline scale io a a EY es Ea O DA aa Figure 6 9 The timeline scale To s
34. Move the timeline cursor to the position on the timeline where the clip to be added should start see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 e Click the inpoint button of the timeline area i This will set the inpoint of the timeline to the current position of the timeline cursor e Now move the timeline cursor to the position of the timeline where the clip to be added should end e Click the outpoint button of the timeline area R After this you have set the in and outpoint of the timeline to the posi tion and length of the clip that it should provide after the adding pro cedure For more information about the setting of the in and outpoint of the timeline see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Time line on page 6 28 Now you have to prepare the clip from the bin for the procedure e Select the desired clip from the bin and drag it to the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as described in section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 e With the control area in the source edit mode select for the clip coming from the bin an in and or outpoint see section Setting In and Outpoint for the Clip from the Bin on page 5 19 fe You do not have to define an outpoint for the clip necessar i ily The clip will be cut to its correct length automatically due 5 to the set outpoint in the timeline After this the clip from the bin is prepared to be added to the timeline mode of the
35. Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 When the in and outpoint are set as desired perform the following S e Select the bin clip in its video overlay and drag and drop it to a video or audio track of the timeline Video clips can only be dragged to the video track s of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and audio clips only to the audio tracks PVs The Timeline HOLLYWoo D R timeline 559 video track e audio tracks Figure 6 3 Drag and drop of video clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip is added to the timeline The clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released When adding a video clip and releasing it somewhere in the video track a gap may appear in the timeline It can be closed automatically with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale below the red line see also section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is defined by the set outpoint made in the source edit mode These attributes can be changed easily after the clip was added to the timeline which is described in section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 If you drag an audio clip to the timeline that contains more than one mono or ste
36. Windows Video and audio data should be stored on the designated video drive disk stripe set only Other storage lo cations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the disk stripe set for video and audio data only Save other data on the usual system disks e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows gf El e Inthe file manager select a video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the disk array where the video data is stored i For a list of the supported file formats of CLIPSTER see sec tion Supported File Formats on page A 7 e Drag and drop the selected video file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse PVs Getting Started CO VAR xyz project_05 scene_1 BAX a File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ss O v INp_xyelproject_05 scene_1 v Go Folders X Name Size Type A 5 Hollywood 00000 yuv 4 050KB YUV File EORI S Maternal proj t_01 5 Hollywood 00001 yuv 4 050KB YUV File O projek 02 SS Hollywood 00002 yuv 4 050KB YUV File 5 Hollywood 00003 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E 2 projec 04 5 Hollywood 00004 yuv 4 050KB YUV File projectf 0s 5 Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File oe 1 5 Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050 KB YUY File ae SS Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050KB YUY File E proect_o6 5 Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050KB YUV File
37. a different color as well as a unique color correction Simply select one of the color vectors from the color vector list and alter its settings in the settings pane with the color mask color correction and balance items Further information about the color vectors and the color vector list can be found in section Color Vector List on page 7 30 Defining a Color Mask After selecting a color vector from the vector list you have to define the alpha mask for your clip i e the color vector that should undergo a col or correction For this you have to position the timeline cursor of CLIP STER on an appropriate image in your video clip that you want to color correct The image should clearly show the color that you want to change or correct The preview window and the pipette of the secondary color correction are the easiest way to select a color vector They can be activated with the button PIPETTE The window will show you the frame currently marked by the timeline cursor and with its pipette you will be able to select the desired color s pipette Figure 7 21 Preview window with an example image To facilitate the selection of a color vector the view of this window can be switched between a display of the source image with applied color 7 28 Dvs Timeline Element Properties correction if already set a display of the alpha channel only and a view of the alpha channel plus the source
38. accordingly After a drag and drop procedure from a file manager folders in the folder area may be created automatically Then they will imitate the directory structure present on the video hard disks and the video files will be already sorted into the respective folders This behavior can be configured with the Configura tion Tool of the CLIPSTER software see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide for more details The same applies to audio multi clips if an audio multi clip is dragged to the contents area of the bin a subfolder will be cre ated automatically which will then contain the individual audio clips For more information about multi clips see section De tails about Clips on page 4 13 The respective data will then be made available to CLIPSTER and you will see a thumbnail of the material in the contents area of the bin By repeating the described steps above you can add as many clips to your bin as you need CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Once at least one clip is available in the bin you can start working with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and add the clip to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Add Clip Menu Option You can use the Add Clip menu option to select video or audio clips that you want to move to the contents area of the bin For a list of the supported file formats of CLIPSTER see section Supported File Formats
39. almost all pix els of this color will be selected close to 100 while colors at its outer edge are barely selected close to 0 The color vector and softness can be changed either with the preview window by selecting colors via the pipette directly or with the bars slid ers and entry fields to the right of the color wheel The Bars and Entry Fields With the bars and entry fields you can change the color vector shown in the color wheel and visible in the alpha mask of the preview window Hue Sat Min Figure 7 27 Bars left and entry fields right The bars show you the exact values of the color vector displayed in the color wheel Each bar provides either a trapezoid or a rectangle yellow lines in the following called selection shapes that mark the respective hue saturation or luminance currently selected The settings of the se lection shapes corner points can be seen in the entry fields to the right The left two corner points of the selection shapes select the vector while the right two corner points of each mark the softness of the set ting Therefore in case the shape is no trapezoid but a rectangle no softness is selected for the respective value The settings of the left two bars are displayed in the color wheel to the left The luminance setting is not shown in the col or wheel You can change the areas bordered by the selection shapes yellow lines in several ways 7 33 CLIPSTER Ed
40. and audio files are not stored as single image or audio files but together in one file CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 2 Content Browser cutting edit point drop dropped frames EDL effect embedded operator frame end marker head inpoint clip inpoint timeline insert mode The Content Browser of CLIPSTER is a software module that displays the video contents of hard disks and network drives connected to the video system It can be used to add clips to the bin of the CLIPSTER software A cut between clips New cuts can be created with the button EDIT of the timeline area Frames image files that CLIPSTER could not load from or write to the video hard disks in time for the performed real time operation Edit Decision List A list that describes a timeline with clips together with a series of operators ef fects EDLs can be created offline and passed on to the online workstation to perform the final conforming See operator An operator such as a transition that is embed ded in the timeline and visible as a timeline ele ment When zoomed far into the timeline the timeline cursor will provide a dotted yellow line that in dicates where the selected image ends on the timeline Material at the beginning of a clip that is avail able but neither used nor visible in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool due to an inpoint ad justment trimming Starting point of a clip For vi
41. and set the length of the clip to be inserted and then move the part in light grey along the scrub bar with the mouse to position it When everything is set as desired select the bin clip in its video overlay and drag and drop it to the respective video or audio track of the time line see section Taking a Clip from the Control Area on page 6 4 for further information To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 5 4 3 Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip 5 22 In addition to setting an in and outpoint for the bin clip the source edit mode also provides the possibility to select other applications than the CLIPSTER software to process your video data with The CLIPSTER Edit Tool provides two ways to export either the original source material or a copied version of it to a third party application of your choice You can export video data visible in the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool or you can export video data that is available in the timeline to another application This way you can process the source material of a video clip further and afterwards use it again in the CLIPSTER software without any difficulty This section describes how to The Control Area process source material when a bin clip was dragged to the control area source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The export of source material that is present in the timelin
42. any alterations in the area of the color mask i e no changes can be performed to the color vector softness When this button is activated the color mask area is locked when it is deactivated chang es can be performed INVERT With this button you can invert the color vector that is currently selected Afterwards all colors that were previ ously deselected are selected RESET The button RESET sets the selected color vector back to its default values CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 36 Soft With this slider and its entry field to the right you can ad just an overall softness for the selected color vector as well as for an already set softness By dragging this slider to the left you will reduce the softness by dragging it to the right it will be increased The softness entry field to the right of the slider will change accordingly You can also set the softness in the entry field directly by entering a value and afterwards pressing Enter on your key board When adjusting the overall softness all values of the softness entry fields above the controls as well as the softness corner points of the selection shapes will be al tered as well This item is most useful when performing a quick color correction You just have to pick roughly your color vec tor e g with the pipette and afterwards you can adjust your selection swiftly by using the slider Soft and its en try field a When the preview window is displaye
43. are effective immediately in the timeline and you can now for example define a transition between the clips or perform a play out To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 5 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 5 30 The Timeline For the editing process the CLIPSTER Edit Tool uses a timeline with vid eo and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for instance de fine wipes dissolves or cuts for the material This chapter explains how to work with the timeline in detail It will be discussed how to add clips to the timeline and how to work with them afterwards The latter will include among others descriptions on how to move in the timeline how to perform cuts and how to set transitions Additionally because the timeline area is the most important part for your work with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool it can be configured freely which will also be addressed here 6 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline 6 2 To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the video and or audio tracks of the timeline first You can add clips of different resolu tions to the timeline because CLIPSTER works resolution independent and is capable of handling even high resolution film material There are two ways to add a clip to the timeline 1
44. can start a play out of the timeline After activation the button changes its ap pearance to its active state TM To stop the play out you have to click this button again Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Space 5 or 5 K Shift K to start or stop a play out 7n To view your project on an additionally i connected monitor you have to configure the output format of the timeline accord ingly The setting of the output format video raster of the project can be config ured with the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area see sec tion How to Configure the Video Out put on page 6 13 If you activate a play action of the clip A from the bin in the source edit mode see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 a play out of the timeline will be terminated The Control Area es ey ou can jump to cutting edit points and timeline Review 13 24 markers on the timeline with these buttons The first button jumps to the cutting point timeline marker that is previously located on the timeline while the second button jumps to the next one Al ternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts A jump backwards and S jump forwards This button plays around the current position of the timeline cursor several sec in a loop To deacti vate the loop review press the button REVIEW again The duration of the review can be configured freely wit
45. clip that marks the end of the range All clips All clips displayed in the contents area can be selected in one step by using the menu option Select all of the context menu CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 4 22 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice either in the contents area of the bin or on a timeline track The elements put into the clipboard can also be pasted into a new CLIP STER project With this you can copy or move the selected element s within the bin e g from folder to folder within the timeline e g between tracks or within one track between the bin and the timeline tracks or vice ver sa Elements such as clips pasted into the timeline will be added at the current position of the timeline cursor rn When operating from the bin to the timeline the selected clip Li cannot be moved cut Instead the elements will be copied When operating from the timeline to the bin the selected clip will not be copied Instead the respective bin clip will be moved in its position e g to another folder within the bin The cut copy and paste operations can be initialized either via the con text menu of the selected element s or via the usual keyboard short cuts see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 5 Clips within the bin c
46. cocccccccccccucuceccunuueccennnnnees 6 35 PIPALIZE siris niaan indak 8 16 multi clip Secpdscavscacchousieteveaieeets 4 14 color value acceca 6 24 name ooa 4 24 6 54 6 65 color vector oec 7 27 7 30 outpoint information 6 54 6 65 disable censire 7 31 pasting ee ESEE E S 4 22 6 37 enaDle oseere 7 31 pending srcurenictesteteurtenettiaiveney 4 15 FESO E EE E AE 7 35 position 3 8 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 49 configuration l 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Di eee ees 3 4 4 5 load defaults xcpccssc2scssceatccssenexe 8 31 of default settings 2 0 cc000 8 30 Of projects ctisercsciataigansqatiesians 8 29 save defaults cccceseeeeeees 8 31 TIMGIING seseeteccecSdasscceeouete ddseaneees 6 6 timeline marker ccce 6 50 video SCONES waz cectirinsendettietetels 5 4 Configuration Tool 2 4 2 9 8 31 8 32 default settings c1isdcciatezsetexe2eex 8 30 project settings ccce 8 30 CONFOrMING oa ieied states ane etectty 5 19 AULOs a Ea ETAR 6 63 connecting the driver n se 8 29 consistency of clip s es 6 56 8 25 container format 8 15 8 19 A 1 Content Browser 2 4 2 9 4 11 Content Scanner cecccecceeeee scene 2 4 contents storage een 2 4 4 11 contents area bin 3 3 4 5 4 20 context MENU ccseceeeeeeeeaees 4 20 Continuously ccc 6 9 CONTASE decries eniron eia 7 24 control aredi irisi 2 7 scrub bar ccceeeeeee eee eees 5 9 6 26 CONEIOIS i ssccsvvcevedecaceiaca
47. easy to manage project You can set the storage locations of such data for the currently loaded project in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool with the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software in the group Project of the tab Project see CLIP STER Configurations user guide as well as section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 for more information 2 6 Notes on Source Timecode Some file formats for clips e g dpx files are capable of storing more information than just their image content These information are then usually written in a specified format into the file headers which can be read and interpreted by different software applications that support these kind of information Among the information stored you can find for example the name of the creator usually the program that created the files the creation date and time the timecode and or the keycode Most of the data stored in the file headers and transmitted to the CLIP STER software during a capturing will only be recorded and if appro priate given back again during a play out But DVS especially makes use of the timecode information These so called source timecodes can then be used in the whole CLIPSTER software For example you can use source timecodes in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and re gardless of their position in the timeline the respective clips will always show and use their source timecode Then prior to a play out you can decide whethe
48. file You may select the file from the list box or enter its name in the entry field File name e If the list box does not contain the desired project file name make sure that the right drive and directory has been selected Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected project file will then be loaded into the CLIPSTER Edit Tool During the loading the bin and thus the timeline will be checked for inconsistencies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip present in the bin is actually available on the video system rn Missing frames in between the first and the last frame of a clip i will be substituted during a play out by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool with a standard image automatically see section Consisten cies of Clips on page 6 56 Then it is recommended to per form a more accurate testing of the bin with the help of the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 25 PVs The Menus Additionally with the project file the bin the timeline the viewing set tings the output settings etc will be set anew and the layout will be updated Inthe CLIPSTER Edit Tool only one project file can be processed i at a time If you open another project or activate the menu op tion New the currently active project file will be closed How ever if you have already performed changes to the project you will be asked by the program if you want to save
49. formed The color wheel as usual provides all colors components that are available according to their hue and their saturation HSL color space and the distance from the circle s center determines the satura tion of the respective color The color distribution in a color wheel is the same as in a vec i torscope Further information about the vectorscopes as well gt as on a color wheel can be found in section The Video Scopes on page 5 3 Timeline Element Properties selected color vector gt e Figure 7 32 Color wheel of the color correction and balance The outer ring of the color wheel displays the color vector that you have selected with the color mask items to the left It can be selected with the mouse and turned around the color circle thereby causing a hue shift the hue slider to the right will change accordingly Therefore any shift of the color vector towards another color can be seen at once in the wheel It is the color that the color vector in the outer ring is posi tioned above When called for the first time you can find in the middle of the color circle three dots that overlay each other These are the selectors for the high mid and low tones of the image Each can be selected individ ually and positioned anywhere in the circle To select a particular tone selector when they are all located in the center of the circle click some where inside the color circle with the mouse Each click w
50. full value range with a value of O setting Full Further information about color space ranges and how to set them can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 6 2 10 Naming Tracks When working with a lot of timeline tracks each can be given a name of its own to distinguish between them more easily For this simply type in in the entry field right above the buttons to lock and mute the track see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 a name You can give track names to all tracks available in the timeline area video as well as audio tracks Adagio 1 R Ritenuto 2 R Capo Figure 6 27 Example of track names Due to the fact that the area preceding each track will always be visible in the timeline area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool it may help you to iden tify individual tracks more easily even when zoomed into the timeline 6 24 PVs The Timeline 6 3 Controlling the Timeline Most work is performed in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool di rectly In the timeline you can arrange the sequence of video clips cut the material or set transitions and other operators for the clips Further more you can play out the timeline either the whole timeline or a de fined range of the timeline This section explains in detail how to control the timeline It will be ex plained how to move within the timeline and how to set an in and out point for the timeline to play out or finalize the
51. guide PVs The Tool Area Deleting Clips To delete a clip from the contents area of the bin perform the following e Call up the context menu on the clip that you want to delete in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Delete Alternatively you may also select the clip and press the key Del on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the clip from the bin as well as all its represen tations present in the timeline confirm the warning message This will delete the selected clip either video or audio from the con tents area of the bin If the clip was already added to the timeline its representations there will be deleted as well 4 2 6 Using Proxies A proxy can be used when working with high resolution film material such as 4K It is a down scaled clip of the high resolution data that will be internally used by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as a substitute for its orig inal material to ensure a real time working environment Once a proxy has been created it will be available in the bin instead of the original material Nevertheless the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline are still linked to the original material and by turning the prox ies on or off it is for you to decide whether the material of the high res olution is used in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool or the proxy Thus you can work with the down converted clips as usual in the time
52. i e regardless wheth er you want to change a single in or outpoint only the other one will be adjusted accordingly as well e Select the in or outpoint handlers in the scrub bars of the clips with the mouse and move them to the desired position for each clip You cannot change in and outpoints beyond the limits of the L original material on the video hard disks However if the duration of the clips is long you can adjust the handlers only roughly Then to set them more accurately you may use either the keyboard controls of the CLIPSTER software see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 5 or the controls below the two scrub bars as described in the following e If not already set accordingly select the appropriate out or inpoint that you would want to adjust via the OUT and IN button of the trim controls If you want to adjust the outpoint of the clip to the left of The Control Area the cutting point the OuT button has to be activated if you want to set the inpoint of the clip to its right the IN button has to be selected If both buttons are activated the out and inpoint will be adjusted simultaneously e Next use the controls below the two fields that show the changes applied to the out and or inpoint handlers to position them frame accurately Figure 5 20 Trim controls The respective handler s will move accordingly As well the counter s will in or decrease for the selected clip s Your alterations
53. if the project was saved you may connect another DVS CineReel and begin a new project Oth erwise your changes to the first project file may be lost 8 2 8 Export EDL Export EDL With the menu option Export EDL of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you are able to create an EDL from its timeline either in the CMX or GVG format The selection of this menu option opens the following window where you have to specify the creation of the EDL further 8 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 8 Export EDL e gaps with blackclips InfOut Internal Destination Offset Options Ovenwite tapenames of bin clips Name Effects Keep transitior EDL Format Figure 8 4 Window to specify the creation of an EDL In the window to export an EDL enter the necessary details as indicated in the following Further information about EDLs can be found in the CLIP STER I O Tool user guide Provision of an EDL File Name In the entry field File you have to state the storage path and file name of the EDL to be created You may also click on the button to the right of this field I to select an already existing file Notation drive_letter directory subdirecto ry filename Instead of the backslash you may also use a slash The file name can be a standard file name of the Windows operating system i e do not use one of the following characters oe ae Furthermore leave out the fi
54. in the Timeline on page 6 61 Further information about the Output settings window can be found in section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 13 Changing Track Sizes Manually The track sizes can also be manually set in the timeline area Setting the tracks to individual sizes may be useful in case you want to focus on im portant tracks or display an audio track with an audio waveform more clearly see section Waveform Display on page 6 68 Each video and audio tracks can be adjusted to an individual height For this you have to move the bottom line of a track separation line in the area right in front of the tracks with the mouse 00 00 realtone Teaser 00 00 L Dlivwan _ Hollywood Figure 6 6 Setting track sizes manually The thumbnails or audio clip features will be scaled accordingly As soon as you confirm a video format setting after adjusting i the track sizes manually they will be set back to the values con figured in the Options area of the Output settings window see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 7 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clips To the right of the SETTINGS button you can find the thumbnails combo box When you activate the arrow to the right of the combo box you will receive a drop down list 6 8 PVs The Timeline At startend v No thumbnails At startend Continuously File names Figure 6 7
55. in the timeline the over write mode is activated automatically Then you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore Further information about this and the attachment of clips can be found in section Attaching an Audio Clip to a Video Clip on page 6 50 Example With the insert mode activated add a clip from the bin to the timeline or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the insertion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of clip no 1 moves to the end of clip no 2 The Timeline The gist of the insert mode is that the contents of the timeline will be preserved at all times and that no clips will be deleted Furthermore during your editing work the clips will always stay in connection with previous or following clips so that no gaps will occur in the timeline Overwrite Mode In the overwrite mode a moved or added clip replaces the vid Ny eo material behind the insertion point l In the overwrite mode you can set a transition between two neighbor ing clips at all times If needed the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will create the necessary head and tail automatically This means that parts of the clips may be moved to enable the transition which in turn may cause gaps in the timeline For more information about transitions see section Set ting Transitions on page 6 41 Example With the over
56. material with cuts dissolves wipes etc as well as scalings pan nings zoomings and or color corrections Thus you can create your perfect project When working with audio you can control the volume of a clip at every position within the timeline for example to create fade ins and outs During all times your original material is never touched or altered because all editing processes are performed virtually Of course to provide for the best possible integration of CLIPSTER the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is compatible with the EDL standard and supports it via import and export functions Once your project is finished you can finalize it and save the edited clip in any video and file format you like 1 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 1 2 In short the CLIPSTER Edit Tool offers Easy and intuitive handling of the user interface clips can be moved via drag and drop user friendly designed timeline including editing functions total control of the editing process via a real time video overlay project oriented and adaptable clip management including thumb nail function different formats are allowed in one project multi resolution edit ing real time view of timeline EDL export function projects can be built up via import or loading of an EDL edit deci sion list projects can be finalized to a clip render function full audio support and an auto
57. of an output image For this the image is evaluated line by line and for each the color distribution is displayed 5 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 8 Figure 5 10 The waveform The horizontal scale of the scope represents the image s horizontal di rection while the vertical axis shows the RGB levels The color compo nents are drawn in their respective colors The more scan lines of an image provide the same color at the same horizontal location the more saturated the color will be in the graph In case different colors are lo cated at the same position with the same intensity they would be add ed in the graph until the respective position shows white PVs The Control Area 5 2 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is available Figure 5 11 Timeline scrub bar In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area where you can zoom in and out see chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 the scrub bar of the control area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project You can use the scrub bar for overview purposes or to move within your project The scrub bar of the control area provides several features for example different colors indicating the state of the timeline The following fea tures are provided by the scrub bar Items of Scrub Bar Description in dark grey Parts of the scrub bar displayed i
58. on an open platform other pro grams than the CLIPSTER software may want to access the video board of the CLIPSTER video system To make this possible even with the CLIPSTER software running the menu option Driver connect was im plemented When the driver of the video board is connected to the CLIPSTER soft ware this menu option is activated and a cross appears in front of it If the driver is disconnected and free to be used by other programs the menu option Driver connect is deactivated If the driver is not in use by another program a simple play out operation of the timeline in the CLIPSTER software will connect the driver to the CLIPSTER software again automatically 8 5 2 Project config Project contig The CLIPSTER Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings You can define project related settings in a project grouping tab Project or you can configure default settings that will be used for the video system in general as well as for each new project tab Defaults see section Defaults on page 8 30 8 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS While the first one includes settings that will be used for the currently active project only and stored together with the project file the latter one contains settings that will be used for each new project as well as for a general setup of the video system Because the default settings in clude configurations regarding the video s
59. on page 8 29 S The Defaults menu option on the menu Options enables you to configure and set up the video system settings as well as the default values for each initialized new project It will open the CLIPSTER Con figuration Tool with the tab Defaults activated Then you can set up for example the TCP IP settings of the CLIPSTER software as well as the period for the automatic save function of opened projects au tosave The default configuration settings are saved automatically to gether with the software when it is shut down The project related settings available on the Defaults tab will be used for each initialized new project For more information and a complete description of the CLIPSTER Con figuration Tool please consult the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide PVs The Menus 8 5 4 Load defaults Load defaults With the menu option Load defaults you can load configuration settings previously saved to a file as the new default settings of the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see section Save defaults on page 8 31 The selection of this menu option opens the standard dia log window for a file selection To load previously saved default configuration settings select in the di alog window the file that contains the desired settings from the list box or enter the its name in the entry field File name File extension ter CLIPSTER configuration file If the list box does not contain the
60. page 8 2 2 6 Dvs Basics After starting the CLIPSTER program the CLIPSTER Edit Tool software module is activated automatically Here you can see the following items menu bar tool area control area timeline area At the top of the CLIPSTER user interface you can find a menu bar This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administrative nature to the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options gen erally concerned with projects and project files A de scription of the menu bar can be found in chapter The Menus on page 8 1 Directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area which may show you depending on the currently active CLIPSTER module and or on the optional features available various tools that can be used during your work with CLIPSTER The tools are provided as tabs to switch easily between them By default you can find among the tools for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material For more details about the tool area and the individual tools provided see chapter The Tool Area on page 4 1 To the right of the tool area you can find the control ar ea In the CLIPSTER Edit Tool this area is used to pre and review your current project At the top you can find the video overlay where you can see the video ma terial Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the time line is availa
61. performing the above detailed procedure several times you can build up a library of dif ferent effects settings that can be loaded again later and thereby added to any project you want Loading Preset Effects Already saved preset effects can be loaded at any time into the CLIP STER software again With this you can add the presets available in the file to your current content of the effects pane Preset effects can be loaded from various sources You can use i a specially created preset effects file see section Saving Preset Effects on page 4 33 a standard project file or its derivatives autosave or backup files see section Save on page 8 6 To load preset effects perform the following e Call up the context menu below the effects folders or to the far right side of the effects pane and select the menu option Load This will open the standard dialog window for the selection of a file CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 34 e In the dialog window to load a file select the respective file that contains the desired settings from the list box or enter the its name in the respective entry field File extensions xml CLIPSTER effects file cp CLIPSTER project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file e Once the appropriate file is selected confirm your choice with the button OPEN The preset effects available in the chose
62. period for the automatic save function of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties More infor mation about the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool as well as various other configurations that can be performed can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide For amore detailed description of all the basic software mod i ules mentioned above as well as other parts of the software to gether with references to their descriptions please refer to section Overview of the Software Structure on page 2 2 2 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Additionally you can find at the bottom right corner of the task bar several items which will provide you with information about the cur rently loaded project the duration of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline in total and the set output format for video in the timeline eee eee ae eee ier ene rere es project information Figure 2 3 Project information The timeline s duration shows you the duration of all clips present in the timeline tracks and depends on the currently selected video output ras ter frame rate Furthermore to the right of the task bar you can find some status mes sages They will be displayed as soon as project relevant tasks are per formed for instance when a project is loaded or saved KJ status and help messages Config Figure 2 4 Status and help messages of the
63. play out will be displayed with a yellow line in the indicator line of the timeline scale Depending on the optional features and the hardware equip ment available your CLIPSTER video system may still be able to handle clips that are marked in the timeline in real time If you are sure you have such a system you can use this material as usual in the timeline However then it is recommended while playing out the timeline to have a look at the perfor mance monitor If drops occur during the play out operation act as described in section Using the Performance Monitor on page 4 45 Whether the CLIPSTER Edit Tool marks a timeline element for prerendering is determined by a setting in the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software More information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Ae Te m _ indicator line j 02 06 03 07 09 x Ao R Intergraph_ 01 07 Figure 6 40 Timeline element marked for prerendering With a click of the mouse on the timeline scale below the yellow line you can start the prerendering process For more information about the prerendering process in general see section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 A change of the video format will set all already prerendered parts of the timeline back to the need to be prerendered state i e the yellow line in the indicator line will appear again After a prerendering save your project file If an already
64. provided for video clips as well as tran sitions They can be used to determine the appearance of the respective element in the timeline further While with the properties of a transition you can for example set the type of wipe used for the transition with the ones for a video clip you can add effects operators to the clip The effects operators of video clips provide you with additional editing features for your video processing tasks Depending on the overall con figuration of the CLIPSTER video system and the optional features in stalled there may be numerous operators available that enhance the editing functionality of CLIPSTER This chapter describes the timeline element properties in detail First it will be explained how to access the properties followed by an explana tion of the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements After that it is described how to close the area of the timeline element properties to return to the view of the audio tracks again The chapter will be concluded with a description of the timeline element properties for each timeline element in detail Following the section dealing with the properties of video clips you can find each in a section of its own the explanation of all available effects operators 7 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties The timeline element properties can be accessed easily in the CLIPSTER E
65. red line see also section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 6 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is defined by the length of the clip You can change these attributes easily after the clip was added to the time line as described in section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 dure the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will either align the clips horizon tally in one track of the timeline or put each clip into another track directly below the selected one This drag and drop be havior can be configured with the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more in formation i If more than one clip is selected for the drag and drop proce S If you drag an audio clip to the timeline that contains more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels the ad ditional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one 6 1 2 Taking a Clip from the Control Area 6 4 When a clip from the bin is dragged to the control area the source edit mode is activated where you can set the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately r Further information about the source edit mode and how to iJ set in and outpoint for a clip there can be found in section The
66. remain there for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of the clip to the timeline again You can also switch to the source edit mode manually by pressing the respective button of the controls see section Controls on page 5 11 In the source edit mode there are two video overlays visi ble in the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs video overlay Figure 5 14 The source edit mode The left part of the control area shows the clip coming from the bin in the following called bin clip Its contents will be displayed in the over lay to the left The right part of the control area displays your current video overlay as it would be in the edit mode Audio clips can be used the same way as video clips in the source edit mode When dragging an audio clip to the control area the audio clip will be shown in the video overlay with a part of its waveform The length duration of the waveform displayed can be configured in the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for further information iJ The waveform of the audio bin clip is not displayed when per forming a play out of this clip in the source edit mode The entry fields of the bin clip are connected to the selected display type of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline For example if source timecode is selected as the display type and such a timecode is provided by th
67. respective controls EEEE EE or key A S on your keyboard In this mode you cannot move inside the project as usual The timeline cursor is restricted to the location of cutting points only The control area in the trim mode shows then the two clips adjacent to the selected cutting point The left overlay shows the outpoint and the 5 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs last frame of the clip left to the cut transition while the right one dis plays the inpoint and first frame of the clip to the right If in and outpoints were already trimmed for your clips you i will see the determined in and outpoints in this mode The se lected parts of the scrub bars will be shown in light grey while the deselected parts are shown in dark grey On the top of each overlay you can find further information about the clip Beside the name of each clip as it is present in the bin you can get information about the clips in and outpoint on the timeline or if ap plicable about the type of transition that is applied to the cutting point With transition applied Transition lt type gt lt clip 1 IN gt lt clip 1 gt lt clip 1 OUT gt lt clip 2 IN gt lt clip 2 gt lt clip 2 OUT gt overlay left l overlay right Hard cut Cut lt clip 1 IN gt lt clip 1 gt lt cut clip 2 IN gt lt clip 2 gt lt clip 2 OUT gt overlay left i overlay right Figure 5 19 In and outpoint information of a cutting point in tr
68. saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for a play out nor will they be deleted via the Clean temp dir menu option They have to be deleted man ually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Man ually on page A 14 6 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Also related to the prerendering of files are the Prerender all i and Clean temp dir menu options on the menu Project see section Prerender all on page 8 20 and section Clean temp dir on page 8 21 6 4 11 Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips 6 44 Usually before a clip is added to the timeline you adjust its in and out point via the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 However after clips are added to the timeline you still have the possibility at hand to change their in and outpoints There are two ways to change the in and outpoints of clips already added to the timeline 1 You can change the in and outpoint of adjacent clips to a cutting point via the trim mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool or 2 you can change the in and outpoints manually in the timeline track directly Both procedures are detailed in this section While the trim mode is used for video material only the chang Li ing o
69. scrub bar of the bin clip its timeline To move the cursor you may enter a position and press Enter Further infor mation about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section Controls on page 5 11 The Control Area Items Description With the scrub bar cursor you can move and view the contents of the bin clip Simply select it and move it along the scrub bar Additionally you can control it via the controls e g the play button or the position field Furthermore with a mouse click anywhere below or above the scrub bar you can position the scrub bar cursor there instantly The in and outpoint handlers together with the blue line show you the selected part of the clip To position them you can select and move the in and outpoint handlers with the mouse They can also be set via the in and outpoint position items gt Once the final length of the clip to be in i serted is set you can move the selected part of the scrub bar indicated by the blue line with the mouse to position it 12 00 The counter displays either the length of the clip in timecode format or the amount of frames that the bin clip will provide when dragged to the timeline This is calculated from the set in and outpoint handlers Scrub bar in dark grey Parts of the scrub bar in a dark grey show the parts of the clip that were deselected via the set in and outpoint If you click on such
70. section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 for more details During the moving of a clip in the timeline you can see a representation of the dragged clip It will be inserted and positioned exactly as shown by its representation While moving and when the clip is long enough the exact position of the clip in the timeline will also be displayed by the clip s information top left and right see also section The Clip s Infor mation on page 6 53 When the moved clip comes close to certain elements of the timeline it will automatically snap and position itself to those elements This is called the snapping mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool It makes an easy positioning of elements possible The moved clip will react to the fol lowing elements CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs starting point of timeline start and end points of timeline elements e g clips and transi tions the position of the timeline cursor setin and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key In the overwrite mode when moving clips or due to other editing work gaps may occur in the timeline A gap means that a clip is not in con nection with previous or following clips in the timeline and when play ing out there will be nothing to output in this part of the timeline A gap is indicated by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool via a red line in t
71. selected range only 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline The CLIPSTER Edit Tool provides two representations of the timeline in its user interface There is the timeline with timeline scale and audio and video tracks in the timeline area and there is a scrub bar of the timeline in the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Both can be used to move within your project Nevertheless other functions and items to move inside the timeline are provided by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as well All ways to move in the timeline are explained in the following Moving via the Timeline Scale With the timeline scale you can move within your project and position the timeline cursor timeline scale e a Ba O ao a o 12 15 15 09 12 16 WLY WOO p E Figure 6 28 The timeline scale To move within your project click on a point in the scale and the time line cursor will be positioned there Additionally by selecting the cursor and moving it to the left or right you can scrub the visible part of the timeline here This part of the timeline together with the video and audio tracks can be scaled from a full view of the timeline to a partial view that consists of a few frames only Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the time line area you can change the view of the timeline and thus move easily and frame accurately within your project CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 26 F Figure 6 29 Timeline sliders With the left sl
72. split Horizontal split Figure 4 5 Context menu of title bar e Select the horizontal or vertical appearance of the bin from the con text menu The context menu to change the layout of the bin can also be called on the area where the view buttons are located The layout of the bin will be set accordingly Additionally you may change the layout of the tool area to get i a better view on the bin or to make items visible that cannot be seen in the visible part of the tool area see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 3 Changing the View of Clips Via the view buttons at the bottom of the bin you can set whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only Use the button TEXT to view the clips in the contents area with their text information only Name resolution Color depth American_Beauty_Par American_Beauty_Par berlin_ town_LA_Part03_ Staples_Ufo_Night 19 H Figure 4 6 Contents area with text information The Tool Area The kind of text information displayed in the contents area of i the bin can be set freely with the Configuration Tool of CLIP STER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more in formation In this view you can easily sort the clips in ascending or de scending order by clicking on the column heading that the clips should be sorted by see also section Sorting Clips
73. table LUT to the clips and thus perform a color and or gamma correction with a sin gle file 2nd Color Correc optional If you have purchased this feature a tion vector based secondary color correc tion will be available in the CLIPSTER software It allows you to color cor rect your clip with several definable color vectors Flip Flop default The flip flop operator enables you to mirror the video image vertically and or horizontally 7 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Effects Operator Installment Description Zoom Pan default This operator allows for example to set zooming and or panning for the video clip in the timeline It is by de fault available for all clips in the time line Delnterlace default The Delnterlace operator uses either line based algorithms or motion esti mation to deinterlace your interlaced material With it you can render a clip from an interlaced image format to a progressive one Usually the operators are applied to single clips on the timeline only but their settings can be transferred to other clips or areas of the timeline easily see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 This section explains in detail the possibilities when dealing with the properties of a video clip 7n The operators offered by DVS and available for CLIPSTER will i be described in detail in the sections following this one Some of the optionally available operator
74. the clip will be trimmed back and when compressed the possible alteration depends 6 57 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs on the available tail of this clip without tail the speed will remain un changed speed 1 Clips can be set back to a speed of one 1 easily by deselecting i the Resize Timeline Element check box and setting the speed factor to one 1 However afterwards you may have to trim the outpoint of the clip to its desired length A time stretching in non real time via a high end motion esti mated algorithm is currently not available for CLIPSTER Time stretching or compression can also be directly performed in the timeline This may be helpful when adjusting clips to a specific length in the timeline for example to fit in between two other clips For this the Time stretching mode menu option has to be activated menu option shows a cross in front Then all alterations to the clip s in or outpoint in the timeline see section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 will be a time stretching or compression and the values in the time stretching or compression window will be altered automatically With this the clip and its in and outpoint can be easily aligned to other elements in the timeline via the snapping mode of the CLIPSTER software to ensure it provides the correct length in the time line in and outpoint remain constant while the speed is changed 6 5 5 Matching an Individual V
75. the current project The VTR task mode of the CLIPSTER I O Tool that is optionally available uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the CLIPSTER software Further information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide 8 2 3 Recent files The Recent files option on the Project menu opens a submenu where you can find project files that were recently opened with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool From the submenu select a file to work with the respective project again You can adjust the number of files that will be listed on this i submenu via the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configu rations user guide for more details 8 2 4 Insert Project The menu option Insert Project enables you to import already fin ished and saved projects into the currently loaded project The bin as well as clips present in the timeline including all transitions and effect settings will be imported With his feature you can for example as semble a master project from smaller projects which contain individual scenes In general the menu option Insert Project works like the menu op tion Open but instead of opening a project it will be inserted into the currently opened project at the position of the timeline cursor The clips in the bin of the inserted project will be added to the bin of the open project in a further subfolder carrying the name inserted project Further information abo
76. the editing func tionality of CLIPSTER This section explains how to apply as well as administer the effects available in the effects pane Further information about the individual effects operators and i their controls can be found in chapter Timeline Element Prop erties on page 7 1 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline All effects operators available in the effects pane can be applied to vid eo clips in the timeline easily You simply have to add them to the ef 4 28 The Tool Area fects list of the respective clip which is a part of its timeline element properties be found in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on G Information about how to add a video clip to the timeline can page 6 2 You can call up the properties of a timeline element with a dou ble click of the mouse on the respective element in the time line or by selecting the menu option Show Properties of the element s context menu Further information about this can be found in section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 Once at least one video clip is available in the timeline it can receive an effect from the effects pane of the tool area This is in detail described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 4 3 2 Creating and Using Preset Effects To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an indepen
77. the predefined color vectors from the list Its set tings are immediately displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be altered according to your liking and the changes are directly applied to the clip in the timeline Each vector available in the list may hold a different color as well as a unique color correction i e you can define up to seven different color corrections with a single secondary color correction operator applied to a clip With the cross in front of a vector available in the vector list you can enable or disable a color vector If the vector entry in the list provides a cross in front it is enabled and will be used on the clip if it does not it is disabled Thus you can easily create different versions of a color cor rection and evaluate their outcome by comparing them with the origi nal image or other color vectors corrections This can also be used to build up a library of color corrections that you can easily choose from Simply set this particular color correction as a preset effect in the effects pane as described in section Creating and Using Preset Effects on page 4 29 7 10 3 The Color Mask Area Once a color vector has been selected its settings are immediately dis played in the settings pane to the right For each color vector a different color mask is available With the color mask you have to set the alpha mask channel for your clip i e you have to determine the color vector
78. the recorded clip s will be available in the contents area of the bin Contrary to all previously described methods to add a clip to the bin this procedure will set the properties of the clips correctly No manual configuration of their properties will be necessary for these bin clips for example to correct their color space field mode etc see attention note in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 7 The exact procedure how to add clips to the bin via a capture operation is not described in this user guide It is in detail explained in the CLIP STER I O Tool user guide 4 2 3 Details about Clips During the adding of clips to the bin the clips are checked for their type length resolution bit depth etc If set accordingly the text infor mation of the clips in the bin will show you these information about the clips see also section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 6 This section provides some details about clips in the CLIPSTER software When adding a clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure A or the menu option Add Clip its properties may not be dis cerned by the CLIPSTER software properly due to missing file header information For example when adding a yuv clip its color space is automatically set to YUV the field mode to Interlaced the color space range to Head etc because this will most likely be the case when using a true YUV file If the properties of the clip do not match the ma
79. the same time Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and after wards holding down the Shift key while click ing the clip that marks the end of the range You can also select a range of clips by drawing a rectangle over the clips that you want to se lect with the mouse The starting point of the rectangle has to be on an empty part of the timeline track Figure 6 37 Drawing a selection rectangle All clips All clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step by using the menu option Select all of a timeline track s context menu 6 4 5 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 22 6 4 6 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline If you want to fill a gap in the timeline or fill a particular part of the timeline with other video or audio material you can add a clip to the timeline with the help of the timeline s in and outpoint 3 point and 4 point editing This will then fill the selected particular part of the time line To add a clip of a certain length to a particular part of the timeline per form the following 6 37 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 38 e
80. there Use the trim mode of the CLIP STER Edit Tool to change in and outpoint of adja cent clips to a cutting point for example if there are not enough head and tail available for a transi tion The trim mode is described in more detail in section The Trim Mode on page 5 25 The SLAVE button activates the slave mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool With the slave mode the CLIP STER video workstation can be controlled via RS 422 from another system e g a VTR or a digital disk recorder such as the Pronto2K by DVS When the slave mode is activated a message box will be displayed by CLIPSTER and the user interface will be barred from entries CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 5 12 Slave mode Figure 5 12 Activated slave mode To clear the workstation from the slave mode again press the button CLOSE of the message win dow Slave mode With these buttons you can step one frame for or backwards in your project The timeline cursor will move accordingly Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Left Arrow Right Arrow or 3 4 With this button you can play out the timeline backwards i e it will start a reverse play out Once activated the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the reverse play out you have to click it again Alternatively you may use the key board shortcut J to start a reverse play out and Space K Shift K to stop it With this button you
81. timeline cursor 3 13 3 14 5 12 6 25 transition ocen 3 13 5 26 A 4 A 4 automatic creation 3 14 6 33 6 41 frame end marker 6 26 A 2 change length scen 6 46 6 47 synchronize with source 5 19 delete cussirdutadeenscaescieiaecues 3 14 timeline marker ccecce 6 49 Curation cccceeeeee scenes 3 14 7 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide ending point sci id eerste 7 8 length amen Ore eee nee Pee eer 7 3 prerendering sarees tere eeEe ene neerne ree 6 42 properties n n 3 14 7 1 7 6 rEVErSE couto erea a aE 7 8 setting a transition 0 6 41 shapes OF WIPES lt icsicivarerisersseniens 7 7 10g cic gee eee en 7 8 starting point csscc cece cciesenccedcesaens 7 8 trim backward s es 5 28 trim forward ssssssssessesieeeerrrerrreen 5 28 trim mode 2 7 3 14 5 11 5 25 6 44 in outpoint information 5 26 DCU occ 5 28 6 47 controls cstecesceizcdesteczcecearcuardcess 5 26 CUE acs2sWanieeieceieienentoensee 5 27 SOUR essre 5 27 keyboard shortcuts 5 28 6 44 OOM AT 5 27 SN ec E 6 48 SIIP rosserae Teyana 6 49 tutorial esssssesessseseesrrreerrrererreerrne 3 3 tpe Ol Clips airera 4 13 type of display esien 6 11 typographical conventions 1 5 U UG sisirain aat 8 23 unlicensed hard disks 0 008 4 17 user interface M N M ZE se tece eee aetetere lies 8 2 OVEIVIOW scxcestgnces dees seecasncasecccen ce 2 6 vV vectorscope 100 cisssssisiecessvssssie
82. to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 22 With the volume control lines you can change the volume for each clip separately If the button VOLUME is in its active state the volume control lines are visible PVs The Timeline volume control 55 14 59 436 line lt 100 level line fAudio SingSingSing 0 1 Figure 6 58 Volume control of audio After dragging an audio clip to one of the audio tracks from the bin the whole volume control line is set to 100 as shown in figure 6 57 on page 6 64 In this state there may be two volume control points avail able one at the beginning of the clip and one at its end Whether the start and end control points are available depends on whether the clip is trimmed in and or outpoint adjusted To tune the audio volume up or down you have to either use the al ready available volume control points or create new ones To create a new volume control point perform the following e Move the mouse cursor horizontally on the volume control line to the location where the control point should be added As soon as you can add a control point the mouse cursor changes to a cross e Then click with the mouse This will create a control point which can be moved in every direction on the audio clip The control points
83. video data will be transferred to the respective program according to your settings made for this application in the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER z7 For a detailed description of the settings see CLIPSTER Con i figurations user guide In the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can se lect an in and outpoint for a clip to be added to the timeline When sequence processing is activated each frame between the set in and outpoint of the clip will be sent to the external application If a non destructive export is selected for the external applications the source material of the clip will be copied to the same path and location where the original material is stored with an incrementing number add ed to the directory name of the clip lt name of clip s directo ry gt lt incrementing number gt After this the copied source material will be opened in the external application where you can pro cess it In the meantime a new bin clip will be added to the bin of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool which will refer to the location of the copied mate rial Once the material is processed with the other application you can save it and then use the new bin clip as well as the unaltered original source in CLIPSTER as usual its bin clip is still present in the bin When a destructive export is selected for the external applications no changes will be applied to the bin or the bin clip in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The source material is s
84. where the effect was added 7 2 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area This section explains the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements Depending on the type of element selected from the timeline i not all items may be available If they are dimmed they cannot be used in conjunction with this timeline element Once the timeline element properties are visible beneath the timeline you can find to the left side the following elements Dur 17 08 Modify before Modify after Modify all Reset Figure 7 2 General items of the properties area If available and not dimmed they can be used together with this time line element In detail they perform the following With the Dur field you can change the length of the selected timeline element frame accurately Simply type in the desired length duration of the timeline element and confirm your entry with the Enter key After this the outpoint of the selected element in the timeline will be altered and it will take on the adjusted length Whether the material succeeding the timeline element in the timeline will be preserved and moved accordingly depends on the state of the insert overwrite mode of the CLIP STER Edit Tool see section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 Further in formation about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section
85. will be displayed in the chart When pulled to the right the bars will get thicker and fewer bars will be visible When the history mode of the performance moni tor is enabled you can change the viewing position of the chart with the slider to the right hand side of the chart controls You can go to the earliest available bars by pulling this slider to the left and to the latest by pulling it to the right Once this slid er is used you are in the history mode of the per formance monitor To leave the history mode and return to the currently updated chart you have to press the button UPDATE see above 7 The slider for the history mode will be i come available as soon as enough data is processed to fill the chart completely when it is set to its lowest resolution If the slider is not available with the history mode en abled but data is already processed lower the resolution of the chart with the slider directly to the right of the UPDATE button The history mode of the performance monitor can be enabled with the CLIP STER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 4 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs In case of problems with your CLIPSTER video sys tem you may get asked by the DVS service depart ment to create and generate CLIPSTER log files Then you may use the button DVSINFO to store the most important information in one file in ASCII format The file name of the log file
86. will be shown in grey Timeline Element Properties As soon as the preview window is visible the pipette is automatically active With it you can select in the image directly the colors that you would like to add to your alpha mask i e your color vector A left click of the mouse selects the color where the pipette cursor is positioned A right click of the mouse deselects all colors Nevertheless to select a whole range of colors more quickly you can also draw a rectangle in the preview window This will select all colors covered by the rectangle Ea ale pipette rectangle Figure 7 30 Selecting colors in the preview window To facilitate the selection of a color vector the view of this window can be switched between three different states 1 When the button a is enabled the preview window will show you a view of the alpha channel of the currently selected color vector The white pixels in this view are selected while the black pixels are deselected 2 When the button a P is enabled the original image will be shown in the window together with an alpha mask of the selected color vector displayed in grey 3 If both above mentioned buttons are disabled the image will be shown with the color correction performed i e when changes were made to the settings in the color correction and balance area their effect can then be seen in the preview window All views of the preview window are displayed in the overlay
87. you can pro cess its source material either by using the original data directly de structive export or by previously copying the material beforehand To do this you have to use the menu option Export to Application on the context menu of a video clip in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool It opens a submenu where you can select other applications than the CLIPSTER software to process your video data To have an application available in this submenu you have to i define and set it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER group External see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide Please note that you have to set the appro priate program parameters if applicable in the Options entry field as well Note that when the Destructive export option is enabled in A the Configuration Tool the source data will be directly pro cessed with all specified external applications If you save the data in such a case with the external application the source material will be overwritten 02 15 08 Remove control point fHallywood Match frame Show properties Export to Application P Eternal Select all Adobe Photoshop Cut XnView Copy Figure 6 56 Accessing an external application PVs The Timeline This menu option will export the source material of the clip according to your settings made for this application in the CLIPSTER Configura tion Tool For a detailed description of the se
88. 01 Figure 4 10 Clip marked in the bin In the figure above the top clip is stored on the system hard disk drive Because this location is not real time capable a warning icon is visible at the top left side of the thumbnail and the respective value of the text information that is the cause for this warning is marked in yellow This occurs because the storage location of the clip is not real time capable The Tool Area i e it may not provide enough data transfer rate and speed to make the vast amount of data accessible in time The location of the real time capable storage is a configurable setting in the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER System base video directory see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide This setting is also used during the exchange of project files between different CLIPSTER video systems The System base video directory should always be config AN ured to the native video hard disk array stripe set of CLIP b STER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Unlicensed Hard Disks The CLIPSTER software needs hard disk drives especially licensed and approved for real time operations because only special types of hard disks are able to deal with the vast amount of data when processing high resolution video To ensure that the hard disk array is built up of the correct hard disks only they have to be licensed by DVS In case you add
89. 15 embedded operator ccceseee A 2 video output s s 8 15 enabling fine tuning mode n s 3 8 6 36 color vectors n on 7 31 TID Airasca aa E 7 9 7 21 effects o ae 7 13 MOP aaen a A EN 7 9 7 21 ending point transition 0 Zee folder nn 3 3 4 4 4 17 entry field for in outpoint 5 20 6 28 copying clips secc 4 23 error diagnostic 00 00 2 4 4 48 CREAEE savisstterakdectacuaninechie 4 9 4 18 exchange of hard disks 0 0 4 17 de lete soriire 4 19 4 20 exiting the program 3 18 8 2 8 22 ENAME cicssseacatavieatesnssczadesaeeens 4 19 export K010 r A E AE AT 4 19 4 20 DIA ssa ceec es aceectetcvataceacacateseeteccts 8 25 SOMING ssiniaientsanacsaieieeasaansextues 4 18 default configuration save 8 31 sorting COS sissiesercessteseieeuess 4 23 destructive n 5 23 6 60 folder area bin 3 3 4 4 4 17 GGG Gea eee eee eee 4 33 context MENU sercizerccttcgacazcssasy 4 18 sequence processing 5 24 6 59 fragmentation assessment A 13 A 14 6 61 frame backward 5 12 to application 5 22 6 55 6 59 frame forward ocsssecccsseetiercccevsics 5 12 extension of files 4 33 4 34 7 23 8 4 frame matching 00008 6 54 6 58 8 6 8 24 8 25 8 31 frame missing 4 39 4 40 6 56 8 25 frame number timecode field 5 13 switch notation s 6 10 F frame Offset 2 cccsseeeeees 6 10 8 16 fast motion eacncsedaieactedentvoss 6 55 6 57 fram
90. 2 preset effect eccer 4 32 DIO isione 4 27 8 27 temporary data prerender 8 21 A 14 temporary data proxy A 14 timeline marker scce 6 50 transition o oo 3 14 6 42 volume control point 6 65 destructive export n 5 23 6 60 disabling Color vectors ccecce 7 31 EfTECTS oscinina 7 13 disconnect attached clips 6 51 element 26cicasdsecebemtieesciedcdeeady 6 52 SOUD siainen ere ere 6 52 timeline ichocthastotiessedccviaxkote Rivas 6 52 disk space secxctnctehetedent 2 12 2 13 disk stripe set oe 1 6 3 4 4 7 display type ugctaclacttonceetcccts easier 6 11 dOM NANCE nocc 8 17 diver aseene r eres 2 2 CONNEC ccce 8 29 drop n n 4 17 4 38 4 40 4 43 A 2 during play out sece 4 48 during record ccecce 4 49 location ccce 4 43 NEDO scacactezctannutanabcees 4 39 4 44 reset COuUnter ccecce 4 42 troubleshooting eee 4 48 drop table s concncteeticivetine 4 38 4 43 drop frame timecode n se 5 13 dropped frames n 4 37 A 2 see also drop duration clip sessen 3 17 6 54 6 65 7 3 timeline ooon 2 10 6 2 timeline element ccce 7 3 PVs Index transition wo 3 14 7 3 file extension 4 33 4 34 7 23 8 4 DVS CineReel ccccccceeeeeeeeaees 8 6 8 6 8 24 8 25 8 31 DVS information file 4 38 4 41 4 42 file format snc A 7 file manager assise 3 4 4 8 E File Names cscaiiusdaisGiendidsaaaxdanainansiwse 6 9 File number c0scsecessesssesses
91. 3 18 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 The Tool Area ccccccccceccceccceseeeeeseeeescecececseeeacacseeeetstsnsnenetesess 4 1 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area 4 3 he TN ea ate E E eee ta cash eesceten ich es see aceeavartenct 4 4 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin s 2cascc3503 sccesgcdcois ieicd a siacccsdeatasaas 4 5 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin 2 655 sets wacciastieeiitnee teenies 4 7 4 2 3 Details about Clips n sesseeesssnnnnrnnnrrrrrrrreeessressrnn 4 13 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin neccsser 4 17 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin sssesiteesctewntncuosasdtedguacnnde 4 20 426 Using Proxies sasining 4 25 2S lt 1 e en E E E E 4 28 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline s icc cccececteccecceseescesieeeness 4 28 4 3 2 Creating and Using Preset Effects 22 2 ccesccsetscaaeensees 4 29 4 3 3 Administration of Preset Effects cccceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 31 4 4 The Marker Table acccctsexcsececdeesecnsetdecaaceecasneotenderatnecaeiewtass 4 35 4 5 The Performance Monitor sseseseeseeeeereriererrrrereereees 4 37 as TheChart reenen a aA ee 4 39 4 52 Chart Controls centeccascgaezet estes se seessganesiDeptasaecersaietees ses 4 41 ASS The Status Bar sc c2e ses cscs Seales acess adda acescduetesticsanceade 4 42 454 The Drop Weal cece occas ses tievescnd niian 4 43 4 5 5 The Table Controls 2 3 5ciesccsessoaieicSeiesesseSesdaiatasestecs aces 4 44 4 5 6 Using the Performance Monitor cesseeeeeeee
92. 7 The Tool Area On the left side of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area It may show you depending on the optional features available or the currently activated CLIPSTER module as well as task mode various tools that can be used during your work with CLIPSTER The different tools are provided as tabs to switch easily be tween them tool tabs sc ec Figure 4 1 The tool area When you activate one of the inactive tool tabs the tool area will change its appearance and the respective tool will be displayed in the tool area Among the tools you can find for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material stored on your system or the performance monitor to assess the real time operation of the CLIP STER video system for example during a play out of the timeline 4 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs This chapter describes the features of the tool area as well as the default tools available in the Edit Tool module in detail These default tools may also be available in the other software modules of the CLIPSTER soft ware 4 2 PVs The Tool Area 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area Some tools may not be shown in full i e with all items or information displayed in the currently visible area of the tool area To get a better view on the individual tools or make items visible that are otherwise hidden you can change the size of the tool a
93. A meattl Ci timdaerAGie 1 3 12 larget GrOUP ssis stss tiseeetasycees iaieretsecsenenieidioatiotaceatacead 1 4 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide c ceeeeeeereteeeee 1 5 1 4 Important ING Gass inre ironii oleraea ernaia 1 6 2 EL oc PE EE E AEE 244 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure n 2 2 2 2 Overview of the User Interface 2 0 ccceeeeeeereeeeeteeeetreeeees 2 6 23 The Task Baisi a eee See 2 9 2 4 Working in Real Time sssnnsssnnnneeirneeeeneeerrnnerrrnererrrnrernneee 2 11 2 4 1 Working with Proxies conse tidctetie oan a 2 11 2 4 2 Working with Prerendered Data 1an 2 12 2 5 Notes on Project Management eeeerrerrre 2 14 2 6 Notes on Source Timecode eeeeeeee eerren 2 15 3 Getting Started scant eeccae cers sticceetetnenieacicccnsns teturiaacpeatee 3 1 3 1 Starting the Program ncsstcucssecs sent deneteaacenGe pea eeee oe ances 3 2 3 2 First Steps in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool 3 3 3 21 Preparing the BiN sanrirsocnnnisaisia n 3 3 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline sccdectcecewcsiecesccctc inet 3 6 3 2 3 Changing the View of the Timeline 0 3 9 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline eee 3 10 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline 3 12 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline cee 3 13 3 2 7 Applying Effects to Clips in the Timeline 0 3 14 3 3 Exiting the Program so scesccacteecsl acencotanesqaneacetets nukancerseegalesee
94. Bin on page 8 25 and section Consistencies of Clips on page 6 56 This section will explain shortly how to use the performance monitor First it will be described how to prepare the monitor and the CLIPSTER software for the measuring of the system s workload After that follows a description of how to perform the actual test with a play out opera tion Although the following describes how to use the performance i monitor during a play out of video data only it can also be used during a record operation However then it will measure the workload when writing files to the video hard disk array in stead of reading them A record can be performed with the CLIPSTER I O Tool for further information see the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide 4 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 4 46 Preparing the Software and the Performance Monitor This section explains how to prepare the CLIPSTER software as well as the performance monitor for the measuring of the system s workload during a play out operation After starting the CLIPSTER software and thus the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area Then perform the follow ing e Add at least one clip to the bin of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool e Afterwards take this clip and add it to a video track of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 For our example described here you ma
95. CLIPSTER Edit Tool in the insert mode the con tents of the timeline as it is will be preserved and moved back wards in the timeline while in the overwrite mode it will be overwritten see also section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 i For the next step you have to observe the insert overwrite e Then add the clip to the timeline by dragging it from its video over lay of the control area to the set inpoint of the timeline How to add a clip from the control area is described in section Taking a Clip from the Control Area on page 6 4 With the snapping mode active the clip will adjust itself automatically at the inpoint of the timeline as soon as the mouse cursor is in close proximity to it After releasing the mouse button the clip will be added at the exact position Furthermore if its length exceeds the length of the marked part of the timeline set via in and outpoint it will be PVs The Timeline trimmed to its exact length set by the outpoint of the timeline automat ically in and or outpoint you may also select a clip directly from the contents area of the bin and add it to the timeline Additionally you have the possibility to select an inpoint as the clip s starting point via the thumbnails scrub bar as described in section Pre paring Clips for Editing Purposes on page 4 23 G Instead of taking a clip from the control area with an adjusted The length of a timeli
96. CLIPSTER software As well this part of the task bar will provide you with help information about the various menu options available via the menu bar of CLIP STER The help information will be displayed when you place the mouse cursor over one of the menu options 2 4 Working in Real Time With CLIPSTER you can perform most operations in real time When playing out or recording the workstation is capable of handling resolu tions up to 2K in real time Using CLIPSTER you can even play out 4K material as long as some conditions are observed To play out 4K you will need an appropriate hardware equipment CLIPSTER 4K and the resolution of the clip should not exceed 4096 x 2160 pixels Furthermore because only one data stream can be handled with such a huge data rate no effects or transitions may be applied to the material in the timeline Then a play out in real time of 4K material will be possible with the CLIPSTER video system However some of the effects e g the secondary color correction op erator or clips of even a higher resolution cannot be processed in real time In such a case the CLIPSTER video system offers you two different approaches to maintain a real time workflow as long as possible You can work with proxies or you can prerender the material and or oper ators prior to a play out When working with proxies or prerendered files additional i data image files will be created on your video hard disk
97. Changing the Display Type on page 6 11 Audio clips provide the same trim possibilities as video clips However with the timecode notation for the entry fields acti vated the audio values will be shown as seconds with a deci mal number i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the values will be displayed in milliseconds only Items Description k 04 00 4i 16 00 For a frame accurate positioning you may use the in and outpoint entry fields Simply type in in the entry field to the right of the in or out point button the position of the in outpoint that the clip should provide when added to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Then press Enter to take on the selected position The in or outpoint handler will be set accordingly Fur ther information about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section Controls on page 5 11 To position the in and outpoint handlers frame accurately you may also use the in and outpoint buttons They will set the respective handler to the current position of the scrub bar cursor The left button is used to set the inpoint the right one to set the outpoint Position the scrub bar cursor at the exact location where the in out point should be set Then press the appropriate button and the in or outpoint handler will be set accordingly 10 21 The position field displays the current position of the scrub bar cursor on the
98. Depending on the selected video format the video overlay of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool may change its aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 etc Rasters for film not included in the SDI standard i e 2K with i 20 Hz or more are output via the analog and DVI outputs only Some external devices have difficulties when handling embed ded audio that provides more than four audio channels In the video output settings the amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal AIV can be set CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs In the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide you can configure the SD outputs as well as set an output raster that CLIPSTER should use as the default raster after starting the CLIPSTER software In the Output settings window you have further configura i tion possibilities at hand via the Options area at the bottom of the window There you can configure the following The video and audio track sizes as well as the number of tracks see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 The analog audio outputs to monitor audio during your editing work see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 17 A3D LUT file to be used for the timeline optionally avail able see section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 A cropping for the whole timeline see section Cropping the Timeline on
99. Drag and drop to create a preset effect This will create a subeffect under the respective effect in the tool ar ea s effects pane By performing the above said repeatedly you can cre ate as many preset effects as you need Markers Perform Flip Flop Zoom Pan amp restorati Figure 4 18 Preset effects in the effects pane 4 30 PVs The Tool Area Once dragged back to the effects pane the preset effect can be named to your liking easily see section Administration of Preset Effects on page 4 31 and or used immediately for other clips in the timeline e A preset effect can be applied the same way as any default effect available in the effects pane of the tool area Simply drag and drop it to the effects list of a clip s timeline element properties as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 The predefined settings of this effect will be applied to the clip s time line element properties right away You can also use the preset effects to alter settings of an already adjust ed effects operator in the timeline element properties e Select the adjusted effects operator from the effects list of the time line element properties so that its settings are visible in the settings pane to the right e After this drag and drop the preset effect into the settings pane The predefined settings of the preset effect will be applied to the al ready adjusted effects operator The se
100. Edit Tool see section Effects on page 4 28 for further infor mation about this tab e Select from one of the folders the respective effects operator that you want to apply and drag and drop it to the Effects list of the timeline element properties edittool_start cp 16 10 Out HD 19 30i YUV 4 2 Bit Figure 7 6 Drag and drop of effect CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs This will apply the selected effect to the clip whose properties are dis played in the area of the timeline element properties Its settings con trols will be made available in the settings pane to the right where you can then perform the desired adjustments see section Altering Effect Settings on page 7 12 Some effects are not real time capable Prior to a play out their iJ application to a clip in the timeline has to be rendered see sec tion Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 To delete an applied effect from the effects list of the clip in the timeline you can select the respective effect and press the key Del on your keyboard 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings effects list t e 7 12 With the timeline element properties area you can set the properties of a video clip via the available effects operators The effects added to a video clip in the timeline can be accessed easily with the effects list to the left Figure 7 7 Video clip properties Simply select an effect from the effects list
101. Element Properties 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields Almost all operators provide sliders as well as entry fields to adjust their possibilities You can adjust their values and settings in several ways 1 Select a slider with the mouse and move it to the left or right up or down to the desired settings 2 Use the scroll wheel of your mouse after positioning the mouse cursor over a slider to step up or down the value 3 Enter in an entry field the desired setting and then press Enter on your keyboard 4 Place the mouse cursor over an entry field and use the scroll wheel of your mouse to step up or down the value In most of the above mentioned cases you can in or decrease the step ping value that will be used for the adjustments by pressing the Ctrl key to increase or the Shift key to decrease the stepping value Fur thermore with a double click of the mouse on a slider field you can on most sliders reset its setting to its default value 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element Properties The timeline element properties can be closed the same way they are called After this the view of the audio tracks will be restored To close the timeline properties area perform the following e With the timeline elements properties area visible below the time line area call up the context menu of a timeline element present in the video track of the timeline area usually with a right click of the mouse e Then selec
102. GB with or without key High RGBA ly flexible and platform indepen dent image format Not all variants of this format are supported by DVS 3 x 16 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in and 4 x 16 bit 16 bit RGB with or without key RGBA Highly flexible and platform inde pendent image format Not all vari ants of this format are supported by DVS Windows wmv various e g Video file format that supports vari Media RGB or YUV ous file storage formats either com either com pressed or uncompressed The pressed or un whole video clip as well as audio are compressed stored in one file only container for audio mat Proprietary streaming video technology developed by Microsoft yuv qnt 8 bit YUV422 Raw 8 bit YUV422 format This file tl has no header The image format is yuv recognized by the file size This is done with a table of predefined file sizes Component order UYVY yuvl6 16 bit YUV422 Raw 16 bit YUV422 format This file has no header Each component is stored as a 16 bit value in big en dian byte order left aligned Com ponent order UYVY 1 DVS saves files of this format by default in big endian byte order However during loading both formats little and big endian byte order can be read 2 Not real time capable on CLIPSTER A finalizing can only be performed uncompressed Cannot be captured 3 Available for a finalizing process only 4 8 bit YUV422 8 bit per component 16
103. IPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs page 4 28 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 When transferring settings to other clips in the timeline e g i via the modify buttons only the settings of the currently se lected operator are copied In case you want to apply the set tings of another operator to clips in the timeline you have to select it in the effects list and perform the same procedure once more 7 6 3 Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an independent effect easily Afterwards they can be applied to other clips on the timeline without any problem To create such a preset effect as well as apply it to a selected clip in the timeline you may use the context menu of an effect in the effects list Further information about preset effects and for example oth i er ways to create and apply them as well as how to use them for several projects can be found in section Effects on page 4 28 Effects Static LU xX Zoom Pan x dstCole Flip Flo Delete Load Preset Save Preset Figure 7 9 Context menu of the effects list The context menu of an effects operator in the effects list provides the following menu options Delete This menu option deletes the respective effect where the context menu was invoked from t
104. ML format where you can select a separate docu mentation for the different parts of the video workstation all in HTML format The manuals for CLIPSTER are also available in PDF format which is suited most if you want to print out the document The documentation of CLIPSTER in PDF format can be access ed easily via the navigation buttons at the bottom of each HTML page CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 8 34 Appendix This chapter provides further information about the CLIPSTER Edit Tool A 1 Glossary of Terms Here you can find several terms and their meaning as they are used in this documentation 1D LUT A look up table LUT see below that provides for one input value a set of output values usu ally RGB 3D LUT A look up table LUT see below that provides for three input values RGB a set of output val ues RGB audio clip A file of the Windows file system that contains audio data bin Library and clip management tool of the CLIP STER software bin clip Either a clip present in the bin or dragged to the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool With the latter the CLIPSTER Edit Tool switches to the source edit mode and the bin clip will be avail able in the left of the two video overlays clip A clip can either be an audio or video clip See audio clip and video clip respectively container format File format that contains audio as well as video data in a single file only i e the video
105. O o EEP AEA AEE E TE 8 23 SOFTNESS cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 33 7 36 renaming preset effects 4 32 USAgE cne 7 27 render jobs window 4 26 8 26 selecting report drops oo 4 39 4 44 elips in bin edececes co taescctiese theca 4 21 resetting timeline element properties 7 4 clips in timeline 5 eccctvrecweathvarsies 6 36 resizing of material eeen 8 17 selection shape ceee 7 33 resizing timeline element 6 57 sequence processing 5 24 6 59 6 61 resolution 3 7 3 10 6 2 6 13 8 16 setting ouine 3 7 3 10 6 13 result file ocne 4 44 effects ccce 4 29 7 12 7 14 reverse WIPE ca seatecaevenctatahensantotnepend 7 8 effects operator sce 7 12 PEVIEW cscs teerdeslaricaidescaacnnteiudeesaudss 3 14 save defaults eee 8 31 part of timeline n e 5 13 transition 25 sesnencasdensalacetanemeennts 6 41 l 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide SMA PNGSS ricsei cona 7 18 filter oere a E 7 18 SO UNS civiriniririeceraibroibiseiiiiaein 7 19 shortcuts ccecceeeceeeeeeeee scene 3 2 A 5 single threaded I O mode 4 38 4 39 size of audio tracks ccc 6 7 6 8 of timeline area ccn 4 3 6 6 of tool area re 4 3 of tracks ccecce 6 7 6 8 of video overlay n s 5 3 of video tracks ccce 6 7 6 8 slave mode 2 cc cecceec eee eeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 11 specifications s e A 11 slide RETIN ccce 6 48 slip sync audio ixcecccasetreloamcgaanse 6 15 slip triMM INng decetedsct aces aertnentagan
106. O project _07 5 Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_08 SS Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050 KB YUY File project_o9 Sy Hollywood 0001 1 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File E project_10 5 Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E 5 project_11 v 5 Hollywood 00013 yuv 4 050KB YUV File gt Figure 3 2 Drag and drop of clip to bin The respective video data will then be made available to the CLIPSTER software and you will receive a thumbnail of the material in the con tents area of the bin When the thumbnail is selected it provides the following features _ Bin Effects Makers Perform Folders t Name Resolution Color depth preview e Colormode _ Aspect ratio Framerate scrub bar Audio channels Figure 3 3 Selected clip in contents area of bin 3 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Add another different clip to the bin by performing the drag and drop procedure again The new clip is added to the clip list of the bin as well Now two clips are available in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and you can start working with them With the little scrub bar below each thumbnail you can preview the material and roughly select an inpoint for the respective clip How ever for our demonstration here we will leave the clips inpoints as they are When audio shall be used in your project you have to drag iJ add audio clips to the bin as well if you select another file than the fir
107. R Configura tions user guide for more information The way a finalizing is performed can be configured during the setup of the finalizing process see section Finalize on page 8 11 The DELETE button is a toggle button If it is ac tivated EEES you can delete the in or out point by clicking the in or outpoint button Regardless of the position of the timeline cursor the in outpoint will be deleted If the DELETE button is deactivated a click on the in or outpoint button will set the in or outpoint respectively at the current position of the timeline cursor To position the in and outpoint frame accurately you may use the in and outpoint entry fields E Simply type in in the entry field to the right of the in or outpoint button the position of the in out point that should be set for the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Then press Enter to confirm it The in or outpoint will be set accordingly Fur ther information about timecode and frame num ber entry fields can be found in section Controls on page 5 11 The Timeline Eg The inpoint button sets or deletes the inpoint of the timeline depending on the state of the DE LETE button The inpoint will be set at the posi tion of the timeline cursor a The outpoint button sets or deletes the outpoint of the timeline depending on the state of the DE LETE button The outpoint will be set at the posi tion of the timeline cursor Wi
108. R Edit Tool the full clip will be added to the timeline regardless of the set scrub bar cursor see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information When adding a clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure or the menu option Add Clip its properties may not be dis cerned by the CLIPSTER software properly due to missing file header information For example when adding a yuv clip its color space is automatically set to yuv the field mode to Interlaced the color space range to Head etc because this will most likely be the case when using a true YUV file If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the hard disks you have to call them up and change them accord ingly e Move the scrub bar cursor to the left or right to preview your mate rial and or to select an inpoint CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 24 oq ree scrub bar Figure 4 15 Preview and setting of inpoint of the bin material While adding a clip to the bin you can already set the position i of the scrub bar cursor and thus define a possible inpoint for the clip During the adding see section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 7 select the particular frame file where the in point should be set and add it to the bin The scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail will be set accordingly e After that simply select the clip and drag it either to the control area or a video or audio track of the timel
109. R see sec tion Supported File Formats on page A 7 e Drag and drop the selected file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse You can also drop the file directory on a folder in the folder l area of the bin e g the root folder The Tool Area LV f_xyz project_05 scene_1 File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Folders X Name Size A 5 Hollywood 00000 yuv 4 050 KB SS Hollywood 00001 yuv 4 050 KB Hollywood 00002 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00003 yuv 4 050KB YUY File E Hollywood 00004 yuv 4 050KB YUV File 5 Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050KB YUV File 5 Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050KB YUV File SS Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050KB YUY File project_06 E Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project _07 5 Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050KB YUV File O project _08 5 Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project _09 5 Hollywood 00011 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_10 S Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050KB YUY File project_11 S Hollywood 00013 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File gt lt Figure 4 7 Drag and drop of clip to bin You may select more than one directory with the Ctrl key pressed and drag them to the contents area of the bin The re spective clips will all be added to the bin With video if you select another file than the first frame file in a video directory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail a pos sible clip s inpoint will be set
110. RANS will be unavailable If there are not enough head and tail available you can use the trim mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool to change the in and outpoint of the adjacent clips to a cutting point If you are in the overwrite mode of the time line the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will create the head and tail neces sary for the transition automatically Clips in the timeline can be cut with the button EDIT The cut will be applied to the position of the timeline cursor If a track is locked no cutting will be performed You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Simply select the transition and press the key Del on your keyboard 3 2 7 Applying Effects to Clips in the Timeline Adding effects to the timeline of the Edit Tool and playing it out in real time is one strength of CLIPSTER Every clip in the timeline provides 3 14 Getting Started timeline element properties the same way a transition does You simply have to invoke the context menu of the clip and select the menu option Show Properties or double click the clip on the timeline Via the time line element properties of a clip you can adjust zooming and panning or set color gamma corrections for the respective clip All settings can be transferred easily to other clips present in the timeline In this last step to introduce the CLIPSTER Edit Tool we want to apply a primary color correction to clip A of our example project For this per
111. Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 4 8 Deactivate all proxies Deactivate all proxies 8 28 The menu option Deactivate all proxies deactivates the usage of all proxies currently available for your project in a single step When prox ies are deactivated the bin clips and all their representations in the timeline will show you the original high resolution materials in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool instead of the down converted data The properties of the clips in the bin will detail this accordingly Afterwards it may not be possible to play out the contents of the timeline in real time Alternatively you can use the menu option Deactivate proxy i on the context menu of a clip in the bin to deactivate an indi S vidual proxy Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 25 PVs The Menus 8 5 The Options Menu The Options menu provides menu options to set up and configure the CLIPSTER workstation In detail it contains the menu options shown below XM Driverconnect F12 Project config Default Load defaults Save defaults Figure 8 9 The Options menu They will be described in the following sections 8 5 1 Driver connect Driver connect F412 Because the CLIPSTER system is based
112. TR task mode activated This will give the de fragmentation tool of CLIPSTER time to reorganize the files on the hard disk array for an optimized real time perfor mance For this you may also start the defragmentation pro cess manually see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 14 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Starting the Process Manually The defragmentation process can also be started manually for exam ple if its automatic starting during the starting of the CLIPSTER soft ware is disabled To run the defragmentation process manually perform the following Before starting the defragmentation process manually make AN sure that the CLIPSTER software is no longer running on your system A manually started process forces a defragmentation at all times meaning regardless of the state of the video sys tem e g real time operation a defragmentation will be per formed Eventually this may result in dropped frames e Open a command line for example via All Programs DVS Maintenance cmd e Type in the command dvsdefrag lt drive gt pean i The default value for lt drive gt is V e After this press Enter This will start the defragmentation of the video hard disk array During the defragmentation progress the command line window will display the various checkings and phases of the defragmentation Once finished with all phases it will start again after a certain interval W
113. This will add the selected clip to the contents area of the bin Mzn Clips can also be dragged directly to the control area of the i CLIPSTER Edit Tool This area will then switch to its source edit mode where you can adjust an in and or outpoint for the clip frame accurately see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 However afterwards it has to be dragged from the left video overlay to the bin s contents area to make it available for the CLIPSTER software Same as the bin the Content Browser provides for each clip a scrub bar below the thumbnail once a clip is selected With the scrub bar you can preview the clip in still images and select a possible inpoint of the clip roughly if enabled via the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool which after dragging it to the bin will be available there as well Further explanations of the Content Browser and its usage are not part of this user guide Clips copied to the hard disk array of CLIPSTER are not regis i tered by the CLIPSTER Content Browser immediately To dis play them in the Content Browser the hard disk array has to be scanned beforehand with the Content Scanner Clips that were captured via the CLIPSTER I O Tool will be immediately recog nized by the CLIPSTER Content Browser The Tool Area Adding Clips to the Bin via a Capturing Clips can also be added to the bin by performing a capture operation with the CLIPSTER I O Tool Once the record is finished
114. a clip from a location with unlicensed hard disks to the CLIPSTER software or open a project that refers to such a clip you will be notified by the software that this clip comes from unlicensed disks Then it may not be real time capable and drops may occur during real time operations Ex factory the CLIPSTER video system is already properly equipped with a license for your native video hard disk array With an already licensed hard disk array a certain amount of hard disks can be exchanged e g because of a hard disk failure without impair ing the real time capability or causing a warning However if more hard disks are exchanged the real time capability of the hard disk array can no longer be ensured and you have to obtain a new license for your hard disks iJ Further information about how to exchange hard disks can be found in the CLIPSTER hardware guide How to get a license key and how to set it correctly on your video system is described in the CLIPSTER Tools and Services user guide accessible via the PDF files of the software s online help 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin The folder area of the bin is used to create folders to sort and structure your video and audio material by sorting them to different folders This way you can perform a clip and project management In this section 4 17 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs you can read what to do to create folders and how to administrate th
115. a part the scrub bar cursor will be positioned there instant ly Scrub bar in light grey Parts of the scrub bar displayed in light grey in dicate the part of the clip that is selected via the set in and outpoint If you click above or below such a part the scrub bar cursor will be posi tioned there instantly To set the in and output perform the following iJ If your bin clip was already set to a preliminary inpoint you will see the selected inpoint in this mode Then you can adjust it more accurately e If necessary pull the scrub bar cursor out of the way to grab the in or outpoint handler CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e With the mouse select the in or outpoint handler and move each to their desired positions For a frame accurate positioning of the in and outpoint han i dlers you may also perform one of the following Either enter the position of the in and outpoint handlers in the in and out point entry fields of the position items then press Enter or move the scrub bar cursor to the desired position and press the in or outpoint button The still selected part of the scrub bar will be shown in light grey while the deselected part is displayed in a dark grey Additionally the counter will decrease 12 00 Delete i 04 00 4 16 00 Figure 5 16 Set in and outpoint of the bin clip You can also work the other way around you can first deter i mine
116. a single step you can use the menu option Delete proxies on the Bin menu see section Delete prox ies on page 8 27 The selected proxy will be deleted immediately from the hard disk array and if necessary the bin clip will be configured back to its original source material CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 3 Effects The tab Effects of the tool area provides access to all effects available on your CLIPSTER video system After starting the CLIPSTER software and thus the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area Once you select the tab Effects in the tool area the area will look similar to the following Bin Effects Markers Perform Available restoration effects pane e Figure 4 16 Available effects in the tool area The effects pane offers you the available effects operators in a folder structure Either by double clicking an entry with the mouse or by click ing on the plus or minus sign in front of a folder icon you can expand or collapse the contents sorted under this folder As soon as the individual effects operators are visible you can start to use and apply them to clips in the timeline The individual effects operators provide you with additional editing fea tures for your video processing tasks Depending on the configuration of the CLIPSTER video system and the optional features installed there may be numerous operators available that enhance
117. als nor would the DVS software components be operational The PCI video board driver controls the video board and thus the in and output of video signals It runs in the background of your video sys tem and is therefore not visible CLIPSTER Software Modules The software user interface is the visible part of the software package of CLIPSTER It consists of all the individual CLIPSTER modules which Basics control the video system and are used to perform editing and video as well as audio processing tasks These software modules are the CLIP STER Edit Tool the CLIPSTER I O Tool the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool and the CLIPSTER Content Browser They are the basic software modules of CLIPSTER i e the ones that you will use most in your every day work You can see them in the drawing above in the oval Software User Interface Depending on your system configuration there may be other i tools and modules available on your video system Further in formation about these can be found in their respective user guides Once the CLIPSTER software is started you can access the dif ferent modules available on your system easily via the task bar of the user interface see section The Task Bar on page 2 9 The CLIPSTER Edit Tool The CLIPSTER Edit Tool is the module that allows to assemble video material by adding cuts dissolves wipes etc to a timeline In the time line you can add clips of different formats an
118. an also be copied or pasted between folders via a drag and drop procedure see section Sorting Clips into Folders on page 4 23 Sorting Clips When the text information view is selected for the clips in the contents area of the bin see section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 6 you can sort the clips easily e In the text information table simply click on the respective column heading to sort the entries under this column in ascending or descending order Then the clips will be sorted accordingly and the type of order will be indicated by the triangle to the right of the column heading The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again The already sorted clips can even be sorted further i e they can be sort ed by up to three criteria in total With this you are able for instance to sort clips by their names as well as by their duration e To sort the list further hold the Ctrl key pressed while clicking with the mouse on another column heading To the right of the additionally selected column heading a figure will ap pear to indicate that this is the second or third criteria the list is sorted by Whether this sorting occurs in ascending or descending order is de termined by the sorting order of the very first column heading i e if the first selected column is sorted in descending order all following sorting The Tool Area criteria will also be sorted in d
119. and its settings are immedi ately displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be altered according to your liking and the changes are directly ap plied to the clip in the timeline The individual settings possibilities of the effects operators de i veloped by DVS are explained in the later sections of this chap ter For a description of operators developed by third parties please refer to their respective documentation To view changes to the effects with the overlay of the control area immediately make sure that the timeline cursor is posi tioned on the clip currently selected in the timeline Timeline Element Properties With the cross in front of the effects operators available in the effects list you can enable or disable an effect If the effect provides a cross in front it is enabled if it does not it is disabled Thus you can easily eval uate the outcome of an individual effect by comparing it with the orig inal image or other applied effects Effects Zoom Pan enabled effect t S gas ae Flip Flop 2nd Color C Zoom Pan disabled effect Zm HDIF Figure 7 8 Enabling or disabling effects of a video clip If you need an operator to be applied to a limited range of frames of a clip only you have to edit the clip with hard cuts beforehand because the applied effects are valid always for a whole timeline clip Some operators may not be real time capabl
120. and outpoint handlers of neighboring clips If you select either two outpoint handlers or two inpoint handlers you can adjust the length of the two clips simultaneously ot ho Figure 6 46 Two selected outpoint handlers The following two trimming techniques are called slip and slide trim ming These are two sophisticated trimming techniques which can be used for a frame accurate moving of in and outpoints of clips while maintaining the length and duration of the timeline Slide trimming When you select one out and one inpoint handler and thereby enclose another clip you can change the out and The Timeline inpoint of the two clips while the enclosed clip is fully maintained in its length as well as in its contents This way you can alter the posi tion of the enclosed clip while the timeline length remains constant Figure 6 47 Enclosing a clip by selecting in outpoint handlers of neighboring clips Slip trimming When you select the in and outpoint handlers of one clip alone you can change its in and outpoint simultaneously This will change the contents of the clip only The length of the clip its position and the length of the timeline is preserved slip trimming O T Figure 6 48 Changing the contents of a clip 6 4 13 Marking Positions in the Timeline To mark certain positions in the timeline e g to cut the clip at this po sition at a later stage or other reasons you can place
121. array It is recommended to store these project specific for each project separately For further information about this please re fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 2 4 1 Working with Proxies A proxy is a down scaled clip of a very high resolution greater than 2K Usually proxies will be used as a substitute when working with high resolution film material such as 4K Then the original data will be down converted to a 2K format that can be handled by CLIPSTER in its timeline in real time without any problem In this workflow you will add the 4K clips as usual to the bin But prior to using them in the timeline you will create proxies of them The down converted images of the proxy will be stored in a reserved loca tion for proxies on the video hard disks You can set the storage location of the proxies for each project i differently via the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software onthe tab Project group Project field Path for proxy data see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more informa tion S The stored proxies carry project specific file names that are generated and administered by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool automatically for the cur CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs rently loaded project When working with proxies a lot of image files may be generated amounting to a large proportion of disk space Once a proxy has been created it will be available in th
122. as the vectorscope 100 see sec tion Vectorscope 100 on page 5 5 However to provide safe col ors for example for a legal broadcast signal this video scope already indicates the safety area of the colors The dotted line represents the full color values 100 whereas the squares show the colors with 75 of their value 5 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 6 Figure 5 7 The vectorscope 75 The colors of the output image should be located within the area en closed by the squares Any point beyond them will be located inside the headroom and it may not be possible to give it out correctly during a play out RGB Parade The RGB parade displays graphically the distribution of the color com ponents red green and blue RGB Each component is displayed sep arately For a parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the color distribution is drawn Figure 5 8 The RGB parade White areas of an output image would appear as an accumulation of dots in all three color components near the 100 line minus head room if applicable Black image areas would be displayed as an accu mulation of dots in all three color components near the 0 line plus headroom if applicable When playing out in RGB this video scope can be used to evaluate the color distribution of the output image ac curately The Control Area YUV Parade The YUV parade displays graphically the distributio
123. at an overview of the user interface of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is provided to familiarize you with its appearance This will be followed by a description of the task bar of the software The chapter will be concluded with some gen eral notes about for example how to perform a project management with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure 2 2 The CLIPSTER software package consists of various individual programs and modules that combined provide the system s unique capabilities to process digital video and audio in real time The following diagram shows the communication processes between individual software parts and some hardware components of CLIPSTER in detail Video System Pedal E ga Hardware 1 Software Hard Disk Array Content Browser Configuration Tool PCI Video Board Driver k User Interface Plug In i ae eo PCI Video Board saa e L Software ai Figure 2 1 Structure of software 7 Although the graphic shows a software and a hardware side of i the video system this is only an abstraction of the real video device to show the ways of communication within the system Video Board and Driver The central core of the whole system is the DVS PCI video board and its driver because they provide the functionality for the video system Without them the system would not be able to display any video sign
124. be down or up mixed before it reaches any output While the smallest unit of a video clip is a single frame the smallest unit of an audio clip is a sample CLIPSTER provides up to 48 000 samples per second of audio 48 kHz opposed to the respective video frequen cy setting frames per second for the video output With the area Slip Sync you can bring your video and audio output into synchronization by adjusting the audio offset For this the area provides different set tings items where you can specify the positive or negative offset values either in milliseconds samples frames or via a timecode If you adjust one setting the other ones will be set accordingly With the check box Copy to all tracks the adjusted offset can be transferred to all other available audio tracks easily Simply enable the check box and confirm your setting with the OK button to copy the synchronization settings to all audio tracks In the area Output Path s you can see the different digital audio channels that CLIPSTER provides With a click on the respective button select the digital audio channel s that should be used for the output An activated button between two channels configures the two chan nels to stereo CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS With the settings of the area Audio Mode and the ones of the area Output Path s you can mix the audio signals of your project accord ing to your needs Ifthe audio clip in the timeline is in m
125. be displayed in the timeline with a yellow line above the respective element that can PVs The Menus not be played out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Depending on the number of elements to be prerendered the length of the elements and the configured output settings the prerendering may take some time up to several hours of processing Further information about how to manage you project best i when parts of the timeline need prerendering can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 gt A changing of the video format will set all already prerendered parts of the timeline back to the need to be prerendered state i e the yellow line in the indicator line will appear again You can delete the prerendered files no longer required e g after the deletion of an operator that needed prerendering via the menu option Clean temp dir see section Clean temp dir on page 8 21 Furthermore the no longer necessary files will be deleted automatically as soon as the project is closed After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more In expression neither will they be used for a play out nor can they be delet ed with the Clean temp dir menu option They will re
126. bit average per pixel 5 16 bit YUV422 16 bit per component 32 bit average per pixel Appendix Table A 2 Supported audio file formats Default ae Format Name Extension Description aif aif Audio interchange format Plat aiff aiff form independent format for sound files Capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels wave wav File format for digital audio wave form data under Windows Capa ble of storing multiple mono or stereo channels CLIPSTER also sup ports the Broadcast Wave format Windows wmv Container file format that stores Media video as well as audio data in a sin gle file only Proprietary streaming video technology developed by Mi crosoft 1 Available for a finalizing process only A 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS A 4 1D LUT File Syntax A one dimensional look up table 1D LUT file defines values for the color and or gamma correction Depending on the color depth for each input value the file specifies an output value for each color com ponent and the alpha channel key It is a plain ASCII text file that has to match the following properties Lines starting with a hash are comments and will not be evalu ated by the CLIPSTER software There is a designated line designated with the color depth for the four color component values RGBA For example for 10 bit video data the lines will start with zero 0 and end with 1023
127. ble In contrast to the timeline in the timeline area where you can zoom in and out the scrub bar always shows the complete timeline of the project Below the scrub bar the controls are located to play out and move within your current project Here you can also find buttons to switch between the different video overlay modes of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the edit mode the source edit mode and the trim mode The control area will be described in chapter The Control Area on page 5 1 In the timeline area you can find the available video and audio tracks Most of the editing tasks are per formed here for example by setting cutting points and defining operators The timeline area can be configured freely and thus can be adapted to your individual needs This area and how to work with the projects in the timeline are explained in chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 2 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs task bar The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch between the different software modules of the CLIPSTER software The task bar is available in most modules and you can easily start and switch between them It will be described in more de tail in section The Task Bar on page 2 9 2 8 2 3 The Task Bar The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch between the different software modules of CLIPSTER The task bar is available in most software modules an
128. can also dis play an unlimited number of video tracks for a vertical editing in the timeline For more information about all this please refer to section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 This section describes several features of video clips added to the video track s of the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as well as how to per form a vertical editing with video clips in the timeline 6 5 1 The Clip s Information The video clips in the video track s of the timeline provide several in formation via their text display a o7z 14 11 16 ae Hollywood 023 lLLYWwoop Figure 6 51 Representation of video clip The following information are provided top left Usually the exact inpoint of the clip on the timeline This value as well as its notation depend on the display setting for the timeline timecode frame notation see section Configuring the Timeline Scale on page 6 10 and the display type setting of the timeline see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 11 6 53 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS top right bottom left bottom right Usually the exact outpoint of the last frame of the clip on the timeline z This value as well as its notation depend i on the display setting for the timeline timecode frame notation see section Configuring the Timeline Scale on page 6 10 and the display type setting of the timeline see section
129. ccccccccncececceenes 5 27 monitoring setting for timeline 6 28 6 29 FETO o A re 6 17 setting in source edit mode 3 8 5 19 l 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide setting in timeline 3 12 6 45 setting in trim mode 5 25 5 28 6 44 ila gl pala occ 5 27 outpoint entry field 5 20 6 28 output audio sinirinin rnai 6 14 COD oreina a en anaiai 6 20 default video raster 06 6 14 format information occ 2 10 SD Vid O aa aroni 6 13 Nv 6 0 5 2 6 13 overlay see video overlay overview of chapters su sicssivedalinnnermtasertiane 1 3 software structure cccseeeees 2 2 user interface ccecce 2 6 overwrite mode 3 8 6 33 6 35 attaching clips wcicteceuedsecectee 6 51 P panning 3 15 6 55 7 10 7 16 LEMS eer aE N 7 17 paste naii 4 22 6 37 6 56 6 66 PCI video board ccccccceec seca eee eens 2 2 PDF documentation 0 006 8 33 performance Monitor sse 4 37 Chart ceciveuavetcesctac actives 4 38 4 39 chart controls 4 38 4 41 chart resolution ccceeeees 4 41 disabled 4 38 4 40 4 46 GODS E E 4 40 drop location sectecsccesssecasd cece 4 43 drop table aoeeoe 4 38 4 43 DVS information file 4 38 4 41 4 42 history mode scce 4 41 missing frame aese 4 39 4 40 reset counter cccceeceeeeeee sees 4 42 resolving Crops eee 4 48 result file ccecce 4 44 ri a A E 4 47
130. ch ing Time stretching mode Show properties Export to Application These menu options enable you to work with at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach an audio to a video clip Further information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in section Attaching an Audio Clip to a Video Clip on page 6 50 Clips added to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool provide various information via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tooltips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is acti vated the menu option will show a cross in front Additional information about the tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 11 Video clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or compressed to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for example for slow or fast motion purposes Further information about these menu options can be found in section Time Stretching or Compression of Video Clips on page 6 57 With this menu option you can call up the timeline properties of the clip where the context menu was invoked They will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right belo
131. ch color component of the brighter average and darker parts of an image separately for example by alter ing the brightest parts of the image highlights while preserving the av erage and darkest parts shadows Lift Adjusts the darker parts of the clip i e the lift or black point Values range from 100 to 100 Gamma Adjusts the average parts of the clip i e the gamma or mid tones Values range from 0 1 to 3 Gain Adjusts the brighter parts of the clip i e the gain or white point Values range from 100 to 100 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 10 The Operator 2nd Color Correction The 2nd Color Correction operator is an optionally available feature of the CLIPSTER software If you have received this option you will be able to adjust one color value in a video clip without affecting all other colors available This type of color correction is often referred to as se lective or secondary color correction The secondary color correction can be used for example to change the color of a shirt a car etc or to intensify those colors without influencing the rest of the clip It works similar to the blue screen effect in film and television where the blue of the background is keyed and replaced by another background image However instead of replacing the selected color with another image you can perform a color correction on it with the secondary color correction The operator 2nd Color Correction provid
132. ching or compression via the menu op tion Time stretching on the context menu of a video clip It will open the following window Time stretching Factor mE 1 Xx Resize Timeline Element Use motion estimation Cancel Figure 6 53 Time stretching or compression configuration To configure the time stretching or compression use the Factor slider and entry field to the right When adjusting the slider the value in the entry field changes accordingly Values greater than one 1 indicate a compression of the video clip i e its speed will be increased fast mo tion Values less than one 1 mean that the clip gets stretched i e its play out will be slower slow motion You may also enter a value di rectly in the entry field to the right of the slider The configured time stretching or compression will be in effect for the clip in the timeline as soon as it is confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL closes the window without altering the settings The Resize Timeline Element check box resizes the clip automatically in the timeline accordingly once the settings for stretching compression are confirmed When stretched the clip will be lengthened in the time line outpoint of the clip moves to the right when compressed the clip will be shortened outpoint moves to the left If the check box is deac tivated the length of the timeline element in the timeline will be pre served meaning when stretched the outpoint of
133. clip B is dropped in the middle of clip A in the video track clip A will be divided and the rest of it will move to the end of the timeline This behavior can be changed via the button INSERT This but i ton switches between the insert and the overwrite mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool In the overwrite mode the rest of the clip or at least the contents of clip A with the length of clip B would be overwritten For the rest of this tutorial we suppose that this has happened and that clip A is divided into two by inserting clip B in the middle of it 7n Audio clips can be dragged from the bin to the audio tracks of i the timeline area If these audio clips incorporate more than one mono or stereo channel the additional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one If you drag a clip from the bin to the control area of the CLIP STER Edit Tool the software switches to the source edit mode where you can select the in and outpoint of the clip frame ac curately before adding it to the timeline Once everything is set you can drag the clip from its video overlay in the control area to the video track of the timeline PVs Getting Started 3 2 3 Changing the View of the Timeline Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area you can change the view of the tracks ma lt T 3 Figure 3 5 Timeline sliders With the left slider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard sho
134. clip can be changed in its clip properties i bin For this the clip must not be present in the timeline of the Edit Tool With the display type set to File number the in and out point information of the clips will provide the in and outpoint with regard to the single audio file only in milliseconds i e untrimmed each audio clip in the timeline will begin with zero and end with its total duration see also section Changing the Display Type on page 6 11 You can receive additional information about the clips via their tooltips which can be customized to your needs see section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 11 for further information 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips The context menu of the audio clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with audio clips Remove control With this menu option you can delete a volume point control point that was set on the volume control line see section Volume Control on page 6 66 Delete This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline i S A You may also select the clip and press the Del key on you keyboard to delete a clip from the timeline 6 65 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 6 6 3 Volume Control The button VOLUME is important for audio clips You can find it at the bottom of the ti
135. clip s text information after they were added to the timeline top left and top right see section The Clip s Information on page 6 53 or in the timecode fields of a bin clip dragged to the control area see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 When you select the arrow to the right of the combo box a drop down list will be available where you can set the display type 6 11 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Internal Internal Source TC File number Figure 6 12 List of the display types From this list select the display type that should be used for the clips in the timeline Selection Meaning Internal The clips use the internal timecode of the CLIP STER Edit Tool s timeline Source TC The clips in the timeline use the timecode pro vided by their file headers and set either via the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool or the clip s prop erties If clips do not provide a source timecode of their own they can be configured to show a virtual source timecode via their properties in the bin Further information about source time code can be found in section Notes on Source Timecode on page 2 15 File number With this setting the clips in the timeline will show you the number of the respective image file e g the image Hol lywood00231 dpxas the starting point of the clip will be shown with 231 information in the file header no timecodes are displayed by i If Sou
136. color and or gamma correction will be performed accordingly By re peating this action you can select and load more than one LUT file and their effects will be combined Several sample LUT files are delivered with CLIPSTER They can i be found in the directory 1ut of the CLIPSTER software s in stallation path default C Program Files DVS Clip ster lut With the button you can delete an already applied LUT from the list box Simply select an LUT file entry from the list box and press this but ton to delete it If you click this button without selecting an LUT file from the list box first the last loaded LUT will be deleted If more than one LUT file is loaded the button SAVE will combine their color correction settings and create a new LUT file from the already set ones The selection of this button opens a standard dialog window to save a file There you have to specify the storage path and file name of the new LUT file Once you confirm your settings with the button SAVE the file will be created After that you can use this single LUT file instead of several ones to color correct video clips Once finished with the loading of a static look up table you can per form further adjustments to the appearance of the clip via the controls to the right of the primary color correction For more details as well as a specification on 1D LUT files please refer to section 1D LUT File Syntax on page A 10 7 9 2 Master Lu
137. color space ranges and color space i conversions can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide In the field TC Start select a timecode frame offset for the rendered clip The TC Start entry field will be evaluated only if a file format i is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the clip will provide this timecode offset in its source timecode If appropriate and available select the necessary pulldown method from the Pulldown and Startphase combo box es Pulldown is needed when working with film originated material The pulldown feature offers a film to NTSC conversion It renders vid eo data that is in 24 progressive frames sec film as 30 interlaced frames sec NTSC This is achieved by splitting the film frames alter nately into two and three video fields e Currently for a finalizing the pulldown feature is not available i To use this feature the video track s of the timeline should contain 24p material only With the CHECK button to the right you can ascertain that all material in the timeline is in this for mat Prior to using pulldown it is recommended to check the timeline with this button Pulldown Startphase Further information about the pulldown settings and pulldown in general can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide With the fields regarding the resolution of the ren dering you set the actual output re
138. controls 0ee 4 38 4 44 tail 3 12 3 14 6 32 6 33 6 41 6 47 6 48 A 4 target SOUP cccdscccciariaeeeskasiadins 1 4 task Dar seschiccessendexesscbocene 2 3 2 8 2 9 temporary data Clean manually aace A 14 prerender oseese 2 13 6 42 prerender data location 2 14 A 15 prOX ES nonnii 2 11 8 26 proxy data location ceee 2 14 text of clips secsec 6 53 6 64 thumbnail osses 3 5 4 13 at start and end only aeee 6 9 adio Clip ce nctraseataasttgecciesntoinin 4 14 Content Browser 2 4 4 11 COMMMUOUS naea 6 9 file names sses 6 9 in video track cecce 6 8 invalid Glip e irarrsiiitis siseses 4 14 multi clip cceteadsaciteest ccecechectecal 4 14 no thumbnail ccecce 6 9 pending clip scsncdiscseecccetagdsads 4 15 scrub bar ccceceeeeeeeeees 3 6 4 23 ROMO OY ater accetceee Riateceh eek dsace 4 7 UNKNOWN sisses siro aria 4 15 video clip seacsetecreermectecsicteeiens 4 13 WIth text sccesticrentencercadadceieransatx 4 6 yellow marking ccecce 4 16 time compression wssssssnsicviccs 6 55 6 57 time stretching ccecce 6 55 6 57 time stretching mode 6 58 MECO oars sseiccendccni nivale eet oases 2 15 drop frame seeen 5 13 EDL tim code eee Penner ener 8 9 format ncxdee sade ctevetsessccsecoceases 5 13 og See eer ae 6 10 8 16 source 2 15 6 12 8 9 8 15 A 4 switch notation scce 6 10 timecode frame number field 5 13 timeline oo cee eec eee eeee eee eee eens 3 6 6 1 add clip a
139. d The default effects cannot be changed in any respect Deleting Preset Effects Preset effects can be deleted either individually or all in one step To delete an individual preset effect perform the following e Call up the context menu on the preset effect that you want to delete and select the menu option Delete This will delete the respective preset effect where the context menu was invoked To delete all preset effects from the effects pane in one step perform the following e Call up the context menu below the effects folders or to the far right side of the effects pane and select the menu option Clear After this a warning message will appear on the screen The Tool Area e If you want to delete all preset effects from the effects pane con firm the warning message This will delete all preset effects from the effects pane f e Only preset effects will be deleted The default effects will not be changed in any respect Saving Preset Effects You can save the contents of the effects pane i e all preset effects to a file e Call up the context menu below the effects folders or to the far right side of the effects pane and select the menu option Save e In the opening dialog window specify a storage path and file name for the effects file to be saved and confirm your entries with the button SAVE File extension xml CLIPSTER effects file This will save the preset effects to the specified file By
140. d effects features for clips in the timeline that enhance the ca pability of CLIPSTER 1 1 Overview This user guide informs you about the general handling of the CLIP STER Edit Tool as well as of its complete controllable interface The chapters in this user guide contain the following information Chapter 1 Begins with a short introduction to CLIPSTER and the CLIPSTER Edit Tool followed by a note regarding the audience this manual is written for and an explanation of the conventions used in this manual Additionally it provides impor tant notes that you should read Chapter 2 Provides basic information about the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Here you can find information about the software structure of CLIPSTER as well as a first overview of the user interface of the CLIP STER Edit Tool Furthermore this chapter pro vides some general notes for example about how to perform a project management with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Chapter 3 In addition to the information how to start and shut down the program you can find a begin ner s tutorial which explains how to work with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and how to start your first project in this chapter Chapter 4 Explains the tool area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Chapter 5 This chapter describes the control area and the video overlay of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Chapter 6 In this chapter the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and its area are described Chapt
141. d in one directory The file name of the first frame of your rendered timeline will be Clip_00000 bmp The number in the file name will increase by one with every other generated frame If the 20 000th frame is reached the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will again create a subdirectory Clip_0001 inthe selected path and start the generation of the other 20 000 frames and CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS so on until the project is rendered completely according to your set tings If an audio finalization was selected for each 20 000 frames i separate audio files are generated in the respective subdirecto ry see section The Area Audio on page 8 17 Video and audio clips divided in several subdirectories are called multi clips They can be handled by the CLIPSTER soft ware as one clip Further information about this can be found in section Details about Clips on page 4 13 If a container format is selected as the file format for a render ing you will receive in the first subdirectory a single file only that contains both audio and video In the Finalizing window to the right of the entry fields for the file name and the path you find the combo box Ren rT der from There you can select whether the CLIPSTER Edit Tool should render the whole timeline A11 or the timeline between the set in and outpoint only In Out If In Out is selected but no in and outpoint defined in the timeline the Edit Tool will
142. d on the screen you can switch its view to a display of the alpha channel of the currently selected color vector with this button In this view you can discern immediately the parts of the image that will be affected Black areas will not be affect ed while all parts shown in white will undergo a color correction Further information about the preview win dow and its different views can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 36 a P When the preview window is displayed on the screen you can use this button It will switch the view of the preview window and show you the original image se lected by the timeline cursor together with an alpha mask of the selected color vector The colors that are cur rently selected by the color vector will be shown in grey Further information about the preview window and its different views can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 36 The Preview Window The preview window and the pipette of the secondary color correction are the easiest way to select a color vector This window will show you the image of the frame currently selected by the timeline cursor It can be displayed on the screen with the button PIPETTE of the color mask controls see section Color Mask Controls on page 7 35 When it is activated for the first time the button a P will be switched on auto matically as well The latter button enables you to see the selected color vector more clearly because it
143. d resolutions and process them for example via scalings pannings and or zoomings The CLIP STER Edit Tool module is compatible with the EDL standard and sup ports it via import and export function capturing via the I O Tool build up of timeline in the Edit Tool as well as export of the Edit Tool s timeline One of the main features of CLIPSTER is that all editing tasks are performed virtually i e the original material on the hard disk array is never altered The clips used in the CLIPSTER software are only rep resentations of the original material on the video hard disks With this you can use the same material over and over again with different ef fects while the master is always maintained The CLIPSTER I O Tool The CLIPSTER I O Tool is mainly used for the digitization of a variety of different input sources meaning the recording capturing of video and audio material with CLIPSTER from other sources than computer stor ages You can capture material from any source you like and CLIPSTER will record it in a freely selectable format with or without color space conversion For instance you can capture data from telecines VTRs or even cameras as desired in an automated batch processing mode or manually Of course playing out of the recorded material as well as of all other clips present on the system can be performed without any ef fort as well Furthermore the processing of EDLs edit decision lists is fully supported in the s
144. d with it you can easily switch to another module After starting the CLIPSTER software the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is started automatically E When you click on one of the inactive buttons in the task bar the respective module of the CLIPSTER software will be loaded most of them in the upper part of the user interface The task bar provides the following buttons fedt The Epit button activates the Edit Tool of the CLIPSTER software This software module al lows to edit video material by adding cuts dis solves wipes etc to clips in a timeline It is automatically active after starting the CLIPSTER software and described in this user guide VO The I O button starts the I O Tool of the CLIP STER software You can use it to record and cap ture video and audio material with CLIPSTER from telecines VTRs or even cameras You can find further information about the CLIPSTER I O Tool in its respective user guide With the button CONTENT you can activate the Content Browser of the CLIPSTER software This tool will show you the contents of the hard drives currently connected to your video sys tem All video clips will be displayed here with thumbnails and you can select them with the mouse and drag and drop them to the bin to make them available in your project The CONFIG button opens the CLIPSTER Con figuration Tool Here you can configure and set up the whole video system and the software With it you can for example set up the
145. dceecere 5 11 6 27 chart controls 4 38 4 41 table controls 4 38 4 44 trim controls o c 5 26 conventions of user guide 1 5 COPY cerieisa 4 22 6 37 6 56 6 66 COUNTER 2isuteidixtientviectiadexincs 5 21 5 27 create EDU se sdkinivetveadeteaeeitewdsvedeedekctakbae 8 7 preset effect aec 4 29 7 15 PIOKY is disnithinderstarniensts 4 25 8 26 CHOP DINE detetieniseccisccseentccn 6 20 enable ceseitin stcsdadetedadadictenedcact 6 23 Custom Name cceccceeceeeeeeeeeees 6 20 CUUsixiediccictie ea 3 14 5 26 6 40 MOVE scececectvessacsrscavdessvardadvasesd 5 27 cutting point cicincecencentantanteias 6 40 A 2 in trim mode oo eee ece cece eee ee eens 5 27 in outpoint 3 14 5 11 5 25 6 44 previous next c2iccccessvetistenvetedt 3 13 D deactivating proxies 4 26 8 28 default configuration eee 8 30 load ocior eaea 8 31 SAVE ch cetonocecsssttasaicuecinonessadaiede 8 31 l 4 default video raster a e 6 14 defragmentation tool 2 4 A 12 deinterlace ccccceeeeeee ees 7 10 7 41 delete clip from bin eeen 4 25 clip from timeline 3 10 6 54 6 65 effect from clip properties 3 16 7 13 7 14 elements range in timeline 6 39 folder bin ccce 4 19 4 20 from in to out ooe 6 39 inconsistent clips nscrccacarscatesenss 8 26 inpoint of timeline 6 28 6 30 outpoint of timeline 6 28 6 30 prerendered operators 8 2
146. deal with timeline and source timecode see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information Here you can set in the respective group the type of source timecode that CLIPSTER will use as the default timecode as well as the display type that the Edit Tool s timeline should use for your CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs project Additionally you can specify which timecode should be given out when performing a play out Furthermore throughout the CLIPSTER software individual clips may use different source timecodes which is a setting that can be adjusted in the clip s properties see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 24 The type of source timecode used by each clip can be changed even when the clip was already used e g in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool And when clips do not provide a source time code of their own you can set the clips to show a virtual source time code The CLIPSTER software will then use the timecode specified as the source timecode offset as their virtual source timecode Getting Started This chapter provides you with some general information necessary to begin your work with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool module First the steps to start the program will be explained This is followed by a beginner s tu torial that shows you how to work with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool In a step by step description you will be instructed what to do to start your first project and ho
147. dent effect easily To create such a preset effect perform the following i Effect settings can also be transferred to other clips in the time line with the help of the timeline element properties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 If not already available in the timeline element properties apply the respective effect to a clip in the timeline as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 10 e Adjust the settings of this effect according to your needs in the set tings pane of the timeline element properties All changes to the effects operator are immediately applied to the se lected clip in the timeline Further information about the settings items and possibilities of each effects operator can be found in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 To view changes to the effects with the overlay of the control i area immediately make sure that the timeline cursor is posi tioned on the clip where the effect was added e Next if necessary activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool e Take the adjusted effect from the effects list of the timeline element properties and drag and drop it back to the effects pane in the tool CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide area The effect can be dropped anywhere you like in the effects pane 1000 Figure 4 17
148. deo material either the first file on the hard disk or a first frame vir tually set trimmed in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool For audio material either the first sample of a file or a virtually set trimmed inpoint in the CLIP STER Edit Tool Starting point of the timeline It is either a user defined inpoint or the very beginning of the Edit Tool s timeline Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When moving or adding clips in this mode no gaps will appear in the timeline and the current content of the timeline will be pre served Appendix keycode LUT look up table multi clip operator outpoint clip outpoint timeline overwrite mode prerender A machine readable code printed along the edge of the camera negative film outside the perforations It provides data for example about the film type the name of the manufac turer and the film stock Additionally a refer ence number for the first image on the film is given in order to match the film with a particular position of an EDL cut list Keycodes can also be stored in file headers if supported by the file for mat see also source timecode In general a table used to transform data With CLIPSTER a LUT is used to map indexed colors of video images to a specified set of output val ues A clip that is handled as one clip although it con sists of several individual clips Multi clips are di rectories of the Windows file syst
149. deo system was altered so that it is no longer capable of real time operations Contact your local vendor The whole timeline contents is stored on an unlicensed disk Either move the clips to a location of licensed disks or provide a license for the storage location where the clips are located see section Unlicensed Hard Disks on page 4 17 One or more hard disks of the video hard disk array may be damaged Replace the defective disk s as de scribed in the CLIPSTER hardware guide S A If drops occur during a record operation of the CLIPSTER video system one or more hard disks of the video hard disk array may be damaged In this case replace the defective disk s as described in the CLIPSTER hardware guide After applying the recommended solution the problem should be re solved However if the drops persist please contact your local vendor 4 49 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 4 50 The Control Area To the right of the tool area you can find the control area of the CLIP STER Edit Tool This area is used to pre and review your current project and set frame accurately the in and outpoint of clips either coming from the bin or already present in the timeline After starting the program the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is in its edit mode video _ _ _ overlay scrub bar
150. desired file name make sure li that the correct drive and directory has been selected Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected configura tion settings will then be loaded into the CLIPSTER software After this the new settings will be applied for example every time a new project is initialized Additionally in the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool you have the possibility at hand to transfer the default settings to the project re lated settings and thus to enable them for your currently active project e Some changes to the settings will be in effect after a restart of i the software only Further information about the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool and its settings can be found in the CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide 8 5 5 Save defaults Save defaults Different tasks may ask for different settings With the menu option Save defaults you can save the current default and video system settings to an extra file Thus you can build up a library of different configuration settings and use them in the future again for different purposes without configuring the whole system anew Furthermore in the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool you have the possibility at hand to transfer the default settings to the project related settings and thus to enable them for your currently active project The selection of the menu option Save defaults opens the standard dialog window to save a file There you have
151. dit Tool They will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right below the timeline area in an area of their own To make this area visible perform the following For the following at least one video clip has to be present in the i timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 e Call up the context menu of a timeline element present in the video track of the timeline area usually with a right click of the mouse e Then select the menu option Show properties Alternatively you can double click the timeline element in the timeline directly to call up the properties The properties area will be displayed right below the timeline area in stead of the audio tracks It will show you immediately the properties of the selected element where the context menu was invoked Effects Zoom amp Pan Rotation X Zoom Pan Width I Height E Lock x Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation I Figure 7 1 Video clip properties With the timeline element properties area visible in the user interface you can display the properties of every timeline element as soon as it is selected in the video track Thus fast editing operations can be per formed easily in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool without laboriously calling the properties of each element again To view changes to an effect with the overlay of the control i area immediately make sure that the timeline cursor is posi tioned on the clip
152. drag it to another position The rest of the selected handlers will act accordingly As long as the insert mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is active i the subsequent clips and embedded operators will automati cally adjust their positions on the timeline respectively When the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is set to the overwrite mode clips and embedded operators may get deleted from the timeline or gaps may occur in the timeline More information on this can be found in section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Time line on page 6 32 To trim several in or outpoint handlers there must be enough head and tail available for all selected timeline elements other wise a trimming will not be possible For a frame accurate trimming of the in and outpoints you may also use the appropriate keyboard shortcuts such as M trim by ten frames and trim by one frame af ter the selection of the in outpoint handler see also section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 5 With the selection of more than one handler of timeline elements you have some advanced possibilities for trimming at hand If you select the outpoint handler of one clip and the inpoint han dler of the neighboring clip to the right as can be seen in figure 6 44 on page 6 47 you can extend the length of one clip while shortening the length of the other at the same time Thus the timeline length will be maintained OO f Figure 6 45 Selected in
153. e designated video drive disk stripe set only Other storage lo cations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the disk stripe set for video and audio data only Save other data on the usual system disks iJ CLIPSTER works with files in the operating system file system 4 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 8 When adding a clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure or the menu option Add Clip its properties may not be dis cerned by the CLIPSTER software properly due to missing file header information For example when adding a yuv clip its color space is automatically set to yuv the field mode to Interlaced the color space range to Head etc because this will most likely be the case when using a true YUV file If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the hard disks you have to call them up and change them accord ingly Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager In the following it is described how to use a standard file manager of the operating system to move video or audio clips to the bin e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows Za E seme e Inthe file manager select an audio or video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the disk array where the video data is stored For a list of the supported file formats of CLIPSTE
154. e Clips modified i with such an operator will automatically be subject for a prer endering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 The sequence of all added effects to a clip that are listed in the effects list is important as well They are applied top to bottom i e the effect at the top of the list will be applied first to the clip followed successively by the rest of the added effects This may be especially important when applying the same effect type several times because for instance in case of a color correction the bottom color correction will be applied to the colors corrected by the top color correction s You can change the sequence of the effects in the effects list easily via drag and drop Sim ply select one effect and drag it to the desired position within the list An effect can be deleted from the effects list of a clip the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Just select the effect from the effects list in the timeline element properties and press the key Del on your key board Alternatively you can use the menu option Delete on the con text menu of an effect in the effects list To apply the same effect settings to other clips in the timeline you can either use the general items to the left of the timeline element proper ties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 or use preset effects as described in section Effects on CL
155. e bin this will make it easier for you to find an indi vidual folder To sort the folders do the following e Simply click on the title bar with the mouse The Tool Area eo __ title bar Audio t ON Film c Film A t ON Film B Film B ON Film A Film C Figure 4 12 Sorting the folders This switches between a descending and ascending order of the folders in the folder area The type of order will be indicated by the triangle to the right of the title in the title bar Renaming Folders To rename folders and thus to give them a different name after they were created in the folder area of the bin perform the following e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option Rename Alternatively you may click on an already selected folder a second time with the mouse After this you can change the name of the respective folder e Enter the new name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the selected folder will be given the new name Only previously created folders can be renamed The root fold er cannot be changed in any respect Deleting Folders Folders can be deleted the same way they are created via the context menu e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option Delete To delete a folder you may also select the folder and press the key D
156. e bin instead of the original high resolution clip Nevertheless the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline are still linked to its original material and by turning the proxies on or off it is for you to decide whether the ma terial of the higher resolution is used or the proxy Thus you can work with the down converted clips as usual in the timeline but when playing out or finalizing you can switch back to the original material in high res olution il PaSa 4K Display a 2 x single link DVI TEH SS Scanner Storage Array y o Working with 2K proxies o Finalizing with 4K original o Display of one 4K stream Film Printer a o 4K Files 2K Proxies 4K Files Figure 2 5 Possible workflow when using proxy data With this workflow you will be able to finish a conformed 4K project with 2K proxies in real time by using color correction zooming as well as panning and or other editing features Once your job is done CLIP STER can finalize render the whole project from the original 4K mate rial After this to check the rendered 4K master you may play it out in real time provided your system is capable of a real time handling of 4K To recognize the down scaled data belonging to one project i easily it is recommended to store it project specific for each project separately For further information about this please re
157. e clip the bin clip s entry fields will provide the source timecode instead of a relative timeline time code see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 11 If your bin clip was already set to a preliminary inpoint in the bin you will see the selected inpoint in this mode How to set an inpoint for a clip in the bin can be read in section Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes on page 4 23 In the source edit mode you can select frame accurately an in and out point for your bin clip Once the in and outpoint is set you can drag the bin clip from the control area to the respective tracks of the timeline 5 16 PVs The Control Area as described in section Taking a Clip from the Control Area on page 6 4 While in the source edit mode you can use the controls at the i bottom of the control area as usual They control the video overlay on the right side For a description of these controls see section Controls on page 5 11 Furthermore although the edit mode is the most appropriate mode to perform editing tasks you can also perform your work in this mode In addition to setting an in and outpoint for the bin clip you can select in the source edit mode other applications than the CLIPSTER software to process your video data 5 4 1 Controlling the Clip from the Bin Below the scrub bar of the clip from the bin bin clip you can find the controls to control the bin clip In detail they p
158. e external applications no changes will be applied to the clip s representation in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The source material is sent directly to the external application where it can be processed Once the changes are saved the material can be immediately accessed with CLIPSTER However due to the de structive export your original source material on the video hard disk ar ray will be lost 6 5 7 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline With the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and the timeline area configured to several video tracks you can perform a vertical editing in the timeline iJ To perform a vertical editing the timeline area has to be config ured to contain more than just one video track This can be per formed with the video track size options of the Output settings window click on the button SETTINGs in the time line area see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 7 6 61 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 62 The approach to work with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is different from the usual one of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the various tracks of the timeline form a stack By placing different or differently edited timeline elements in other video tracks at the same position in the timeline you can change the contents for a play out at that position easily With vertical editing you still work with the video track s the usual way i e horizontall
159. e of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is described in section Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element on page 6 59 When a bin clip is available in the source edit mode of the control area you can process its source material either by using the original data di rectly destructive export or by previously copying the material before hand To do this you have to use the menu option Export to Application on the context menu of the bin clip s video overlay fHollywood de aati E Eternal HOLLY Delete jm 00 00 Figure 5 17 Processing video material The menu option Export to Application opens a submenu where you can select another application than the CLIPSTER software to process your video data To have an application available in this submenu you have to define and set it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER group External see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide Please note that you have to set the appro priate program parameters if applicable in the Options entry field as well Note that when the Destructive export option is enabled in the Configuration Tool the source data will be directly pro cessed with all specified external applications If you save the data in such a case with the external application the source material will be overwritten 5 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 5 24 As soon as an application under this option is selected the
160. e sample backward 5 17 frame sample forward a e 5 17 l 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide frame end marker timeline cursor 6 26 A 2 Full eei E 6 24 8 16 full screen nocccccccccece 2 6 3 2 G EAIN rrarena i a E NE 7 26 gaMMAa Lene 7 24 7 26 gap in timeline sxicseseeerctnt erie 6 36 COS cede ac sada ces ereeecaeeeenee 6 36 si Mererrererterrote errerresr crore ror rs 6 37 generic source timecode 2 15 PIGSSOIY 2icsecivasiuieashciditaslacatasieadiaw A 1 EA E EEE T A 8 7 H to ET 6 24 8 16 head 3 14 6 32 6 33 6 41 6 47 6 48 A 2 headroom cccceeeeeeeeees 5 4 5 6 5 7 help ocana adic 8 33 for menu options n se 2 10 IA A o EAEE PE E ATT 7 24 7 39 history mode escccecccee 4 41 HSL color space 7 25 7 32 7 38 RUG sirerisrorsrerarearnirenierst 7 25 7 34 l I O mode multi threaded 4 38 4 39 4 48 single threaded 4 38 4 39 I O TOOl cccccc cece eee eeees 2 3 2 9 4 13 import DIE a E E 8 24 default configuration load 8 31 TGs etch tete st eee 4 33 OVS Creche sect see teecectge 8 5 important notes acre ncsncsenternund 1 6 indicator line a e 6 36 information clip duration essene 6 54 6 65 clip Inpoint n se 6 53 6 64 clip outpoint o2cecSseascanadens 6 54 6 65 name of CIP esses 6 54 6 65 project file ne 2 10 timeline duration 2 cc cicccccsece 2 10 via tooltips acitcecxieestseiss 6 11 6 54 video raster eseese 2 10 inf
161. e video hard disk array For this select the menu option Delete proxies on the Bin menu It will delete all proxies that were created for the current project In case you want to delete a single proxy only you can use the i menu option Delete proxy on the context menu of a clip in the bin Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 25 After the selection of the menu option Delete proxies all proxies will be deleted immediately from the hard disk array and if necessary the bin clips will be configured back to their original source material 8 4 7 Activate all proxies Activate all proxies With the menu option Activate all proxies you can activate the usage of all proxies that are currently available for your project in one step Then the respective bin clips and all their representations in the timeline will show you the down converted materials instead of the originals that exceed the real time capability of CLIPSTER After this the bin clips are configured to the proxies as their source and the properties of the clips will detail this accordingly Alternatively you can use the menu option Activate proxy on li the context menu of a clip in the bin to activate a proxy indi vidually Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Working in
162. ease 5 7 video track ccce 3 7 6 3 6 4 DUTTON oo ee ceec eee eeee eee ees 3 10 6 34 change display occ 6 8 Nide ean e mer pee meee ome 6 6 101e csc E eee dade 6 34 MUTE ae ee E rere 6 34 NaMe peck oases cesta decade erescestass 6 24 PAU SR posse eee 6 7 BILE aore cae ets ns ea dense tanene veces 6 7 size manual setting lt cccicccscseseens 6 8 view buttons bin o ae 4 5 4 6 view of timeline ae 6 25 virtual source timecode 2 16 6 12 exporting EDI izssesueciasizetonieanteds 8 9 VOIUME 2ocnczeatethceceainenvaeniatacatennnsannts 1 1 control line se tescsscc cece teeeticesensas 6 67 control point asccccscetcnericssisters 6 67 VIR ec aecsccectec ucts tiirat niiki 5 11 W warning MESSaAge isere 4 16 waveform video scope nsss 5 7 waveform display 5 16 6 68 PVs Index Windows Y file manager ee 3 4 4 8 file system REEERE ERTE EA 3 4 4 7 YUV parade as 5 as0 hrajscalacbyaye lu ais aie eialeit s Betatbelaweniesse 5 7 shortcuts cceceeeee eee eees 3 2 A 5 WIPE ainssi onie ini 3 14 7 6 Z Crossfad cdacecssncedensidabntescanseneds 7 6 FOVOISE sonnoridiri iheni 7 8 zoom on timeline 3 9 5 9 6 26 ShaApES eee ee reer 7 7 ZOOMING ected 3 15 6 55 7 10 7 16 SOFTNESS ccecccecceecseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 7 8 1 hs se aroen ieee aa ieg riNe 7 18 workflow proxy usage eeeeeee 2 12 PLOTS sericese aE 7 16 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide
163. ection To import a bin choose in the dialog window for the selection of a file the project file that contains the desired bin For the import you may also select a bin file which may have been previously created via the menu option Export Bin see section Export Bin on page 8 25 File extensions cp CLIPSTER project file CD CLIPSTER bin file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file Select the file from the list box of the dialog window or enter the its name in the entry field File name If the list box does not contain the desired file name make sure that the correct drive and directory has been selected Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected bin with folders and clips of the respective file will then be loaded into your cur rently active project The imported bin will be checked for inconsisten PVs The Menus cies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip is actually present on the video system With the help of the menu option Check Bin of the Bin menu i you can perform a more accurate testing of your bin see sec tion Check Bin on page 8 25 8 4 2 Export Bin You can export the bin of your currently active project with the menu option Export Bin The selection of this menu option opens a standard dialog window to save a file There you have to specify the storage path and file na
164. ed 5 5 vectorscope 75 sesssnsisesssririreeennns 5 5 vertical editing cecce 6 61 A 4 video file format oes arate esaret a A 7 OUTPUT hiriren 6 13 properties 2 5 3 6 4 24 6 55 resolution 3 7 3 10 6 2 6 13 8 16 thumbnail of clip 4 13 vertical editing ecce 6 61 video board esssssssssssreserrrerrrrrerre 2 2 connecting the driver 8 29 dre Acacectcectecpensetieteatceszasesees 2 2 Video CIID sorniera 6 53 A 4 attach to audio 6 50 6 55 6 66 length ecetececeeeetee tect 5 21 properties asecceceniuceeeaencustes 7 1 7 9 source 5 22 5 24 6 54 6 58 6 59 thumbnail ccccceceeeeee ees 4 13 video format see output format video hard disks 1 6 3 4 4 7 4 45 exchange fen2ct5t tasceselsweiielaus 4 17 liCEn5E aseiksi eases 4 17 location of storage a n 4 16 performance nsss 4 37 4 45 video overlay ecccccccceeer 5 2 aspect ratio ccce 5 2 6 13 safety areas aiccceiecaviadaatizeccadacents 5 2 SZE ee E te eearceesiene 5 3 video raster 3 7 3 10 5 2 6 13 default eceset ete aectiersieveiaceseaes 6 14 information n 2 10 VIdEO SCOPE 2 teeceatecGeaateatere otatteacre 5 3 activation ccce 5 3 Configuration eee eee pee eee ee 5 4 deactivation ccce 5 4 layout configuration 5 4 RGB parade iscsecdecacetecccessesssesasis 5 6 vectorscope 100 ncen 5 5 vectorscope 75 eesssnisessssrniee 5 5 WEN CONN eseina 5 7 YUV parade cA cecnanceincaarecnrvecs
165. ed in the first subdirectory i e in lt File entry field gt _0000 Video and audio clips divided in several subdirectories are i called multi clips They can be handled by the CLIPSTER soft ware as one clip Further information about this can be found in section Details about Clips on page 4 13 Finalizing The buttons on the bottom right hand side of the window Finalizing allow you to control this window Use the button RENDER to close the Finalizing window and start the generation and rendering process soon as the necessary information are set such as output type storage information and format ii The button RENDER will be available as The state of the rendering process will be indicated by a progress bar As soon as it reaches 100 the process will be finished and the window with the progress bar will be closed You can then access the generated clip s With the button CLOSE you can close the Finaliz ing window without starting a rendering process You will then return to the main window of the CLIPSTER software 8 2 10 Prerender all 8 20 With the Prerender all menu option you can prerender all parts of the timeline that need to be processed before a play out together in one step A prerendering may be indicated prior to a play out when the CLIPSTER video system is not able to handle the contents of the time line in real time for instance a special operator This will
166. ed into a folder via thumbnails Each thumbnail provides also a scrub bar to set roughly the inpoint of the re spective clip 3 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 3 4 a You can configure the appearance of the bin freely It will be saved together with the project file You can arrange the areas horizontally if you like perform a right mouse click on the bin s title bar or the button area and select the respective appearance from the context menu Via the buttons in the button area you can set whether the clips shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only The kind of text information displayed in the bin can be set freely with the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options Project config Furthermore the right edge of the tool area can be moved for example to display the contents of the activated tool com pletely Then in case of the bin you will be able to view the thumbnails together with all text information available If you pull the right edge of the tool area completely to the left the tool area will no longer be visible if you pull it completely to the right the control area will be hidden and the contents of the activated tool will be displayed in full To prepare the bin for a project you have to fill it with audio and or vid eo material first For this perform the following li CLIPSTER works with files in the operating system file system of
167. eeee ees 2 4 add to timeline certain length 6 37 Edit Tool c cceceeeeeeeeees 2 3 2 9 arrange on timeline 6 6 35 1 0 Tool se 2 3 2 9 4 13 AUGIO araara 4 14 6 64 CON MENU ceccecceecceeeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 change appearance video 6 8 log files osc iverececenseceescos oer Zeae 4 42 change contents only 04 6 49 optional features 2 5 4 28 6 18 CONSISTENCY nossos 6 56 8 25 7 1 7 9 copying Senate een 4 22 4 23 6 37 options pedwtans E A A 1 2 CrOp CONTENTED ae scnasetentarsarabetet 6 20 software modules 2 2 2 9 cutting a clip eee 6 40 software structure c 00 08 2 2 delete effect i c 7 14 tools and services n 2 4 delete from bin 005 4 25 E E 20 See ve E 8 7 delete from timeline 3 10 6 39 color COMponent ee 7 25 6 54 6 65 color correction ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 55 duration 3 17 6 54 6 65 7 3 see also primary color correction file name display eee 6 9 see also secondary color correction frame missing 4 39 4 40 6 56 library PE A E T 7 31 8 25 monitoring of correction 5 3 inpoint information 6 53 6 64 settings CC operator 7 22 7 27 INVALIA oo cccccccccccccccccccccccccceccee 4 14 color MASK cscavscdvceives cients ccteseseseees 7 31 length 3 8 3 12 5 21 6 4 6 37 i Foe eee ee ee ere ee 7 28 6 46 6 48 7 3 color space range ecce 5 4 6 24 MOVE
168. eeeeeeeeteetereeteeeees 2 11 2 14 A 4 POO e Chas os5cnscicecee seat esesasasenetete 8 6 activate eecceeeeeeee es 4 26 8 27 scale of timeline Create cccccecscveceenenseneenens 4 25 8 26 see timeline scale data location cccceeeeee eee 2 14 scaling auto 3 10 6 13 8 17 deactivate eee 4 26 8 28 SFU sissies A 4 delete l n 4 27 8 27 serub bar nesses A 4 delete temporary data A 14 control area cccceeseeeeeeeees 5 9 6 26 USAgE ac scicae cee caausinc saczcseucecece 4 25 cursor 5 10 5 17 5 21 6 27 WOPKPIOW ec ees eeeeceeeseeseeeu eeu eees 2 12 cursor position TREE EEEE AE 5 20 pulldown E ET 8 16 synchronize with timeline 5 19 thumbnail oosa 3 6 4 23 R SD outputs oa sc roar tnretcintatoeosames ences 6 13 secondary color correction 7 9 7 27 real time alpha channel cccsclocccseadeessvess 7 36 capability of clips 2 11 4 15 4 48 color Mask seeen 7 28 7 31 COTES wolne a ee 4 39 color vector list aace 7 30 operation 2 11 2 14 4 15 4 37 high Mid lOW nosses 7 39 4 48 5 2 pipettes iaar et 7 28 7 36 performance 1 6 4 37 4 45 prerendering s s 7 30 WamMing enrica 4 16 preview window 7 28 7 35 7 36 recent files ee 8 5 primary color correction 7 29 7 37 record reset color correction ec 7 40 performance nssr 4 45 reset color vector neeese 7 35 resolving drops sssssssnnnnnenneees 4 49 selection shape esssssnnnnnnnnnn 7 33 FO
169. eeeeeees 4 45 The Control Areas ccreieincrce tani teens cadens 5 1 5 1 The Video VMAs hetatecte ete tacate reigns spp cle tetetetes eet 5 2 5 1 1 Configuring the Video Overlay c1iiiwviedeecteienceess 5 2 5 1 2 The Video SCO CS es acace cs sieivnceveaccsicesncasteconesisaeoeneeeyeseuate 5 3 5 2 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area seeen 5 9 5 3 0 0 ce eeneerereernee eer ner roa a eterna err er ore 5 11 5 4 The Source Edit Mode asiec cies sews ceatatsorstasdsceescreisiccedetiteiced 5 15 5 4 1 Controlling the Clip from the Bin 5 17 5 4 2 Setting In and Outpoint for the Clip from the Bin 5 19 5 4 3 Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip 5 22 5 5 The Tim IO eas atc gseseacnicsstecensazenstiasopnasaemetaaeoaeengecsass 5 25 5 5 1 The Trim Controls eeen 5 26 5 5 2 Setting In and Outpoint of Clips ee 5 28 PVs Contents 6 The Timeline cca cress eos acavesd ane cobs dhcavessipsauslotstiadeveteaededle 6 1 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline i cescsecovetgeecanscateeercnetieretacbesecieits 6 2 6 1 1 Taking a Clip Directly from the Bin na se 6 3 6 1 2 Taking a Clip from the Control Area secere 6 4 6 2 Configuring the Timeline czrgecnssendaccnerdeeaeendbcessteeea se dadiecen ele 6 6 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area ee 6 6 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clips 006 6 8 6 2 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale siecicsc ccc sesveciegsiezeses tebe 6 10 6
170. eeseessaves 7 2 action safety areas s 5 2 activating proxies 0 4 26 8 27 add clip tO DIN oo eee ecc eee eee riiseni 3 4 4 7 to timeline o c 3 7 6 2 to timeline certain length 6 37 ANV ene eee nee pee ereceree e 6 13 6 17 alpha channel n 7 29 7 36 aperture see sharpness application export 5 22 6 55 6 59 destructive 000 5 23 6 60 sequence processing 5 24 6 59 6 61 applying effects 3 15 4 28 7 10 applying preset effects 4 31 7 15 aspect ratio n n 5 2 8 17 during Cropping ic 5 ne veccneees 6 21 during finalizing ee 8 17 video overlay necc 5 2 6 13 zoom and pan viccesas tear esaseenetss 7 17 At start end ceee 6 9 attaching audio to video 6 50 6 55 6 66 audio 3 6 3 8 4 8 6 4 6 5 6 64 I l I l analog output pinmcectasaudsteraees 6 17 channels noce 6 15 8 18 channels embedded 6 13 6 17 fades ere ee noe ee eee 6 67 file formats 2c ccve av ccekscesavezaceces A 9 UIST D titei iiaeia 6 16 MONItOT ING ccecce 6 17 mMUlti clip csiis 4 9 4 15 multiple channels 4 14 6 4 6 5 6 64 OU PU sates aceeectecaseiaess 6 14 8 18 output default setting 6 14 peaks Leenen 6 67 properties yicusseiisetecedicess 3 6 4 24 properties of multi clip 4 15 4 24 sample secc 6 15 A 2 A 3 SUID SYNC ct 2icttciniantvatictevetageeyead 6 15 thumbnail of clip eeen 4 14 VOIUME isir uraa
171. el on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the folder and all clips that are sorted into it confirm the warning message 4 19 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs This will delete the respective folder where the context menu was in voked If clips were sorted into the selected folder they will be deleted as well Only formerly created folders can be deleted The root folder cannot be changed in any respect 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin In the contents area of the bin you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails and or text information If the thumbnail view is activated and a clip is selected in the contents area a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip is provided by each thumbnail File format TIFF File path VAclips Duration TA Name Riesenrad File format TIFF LA Resolution 1920 x 1080 pixel File path WAolips i Color depth 12 bits Filename Riesenrad 06d bmp beos j Colormode RGB 4 4 4 Frame size 9 3 MB Aspect ratio 1 77777778 16 9 Datarate 223 9 MB s Framerate 23 976p Duration 30 01 Vom nacn Name File format TIFF File path File n Fram Data rate Duration 09 11 File format Bitmap File path File nam Fram Data rate Duration 06 21 Figure 4 13 Clips in the contents area of the bin
172. eline cursor at cutting point This will make the button TRANS available in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool user interface e Select the button TRANS A transition appears between the two clips 3 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs timeline cursor 06 00 o A transition Staples_Ufe Hollhawoo Figure 3 12 Transition in timeline Via the context menu of the transition you can set the properties of the transition for example change the type of wipe for the transition e Invoke the context menu on the transition in the timeline usually with a right click of the mouse and select the menu option Show Properties Alternatively you can also double click the transition to call up the properties directly The properties will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right be low the timeline area e With the properties of the transition available select as a transition type for example Vertical Wipe from the list box 7 To the left of the properties area you can also set the duration i of the transition frame accurately Simply type in the duration in timecode format and confirm it with the Enter key This will apply the selected transition type to the transition between the two clips You may now use the controls of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool to review the last transition In the insert mode there must be enough head and or tail i available of at least one clip to set a transition otherwise the button T
173. em For most of these tasks the context menu of the folders in the folder area is used usually invoked with a right click of the mouse It pro vides different folder related functions such as the creation of a new folder in the folder area or the renaming of an existent one Film New folder K Film Delete Rename Figure 4 11 Context menu of a folder in the folder area Creating Folders Via the context menu you can create a new folder manually in the fold er area of the bin e Call up the context menu on a folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option New folder This will create a new folder in the folder area It will be placed as a sub folder below the selected folder where the context menu was invoked After this you have to assign a name to the newly created folder e Enter the name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the new folder will be present in the folder area of the bin and you can use it to sort your audio and or video material into it see section Working with Clips in the Bin on page 4 20 Folders can also be created automatically with a drag and drop i procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 8 Sorting Folders As soon as folders are available in the folder area of the bin you can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains a lot of folders in th
174. em that contain subdirectories with frames image files and or audio files The subdirectories and files must follow specific guidelines to be recognized by the CLIPSTER software as a multi clip An editing effect that can be applied to video clips either as an embedded operator or as an operator set via the clip s timeline element prop erties End of a clip For video material either the last file on the hard disk or a last frame virtually set trimmed in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool For audio material either the last sample of a file or a vir tually set trimmed outpoint in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The end of the timeline It is either a user de fined outpoint or the last frame sample of the timeline s content Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When deleting or moving clips in the timeline gaps may appear and by adding or moving timeline elements the contents of the timeline may be overwritten The calculating and rendering of timeline ele ments prior to a play out because they exceed the real time capability of CLIPSTER A 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DvS preset effect proxy scrub bar to scrub source timecode tail timeline cursor timeline element transition vertical editing video clip A 4 User defined settings of an effects operator They are available as subeffects under the re spective effects operator in the tool area With them you can apply the same
175. emporary data contain material for the respective project only For this you have to use a project specific directory struc ture as described in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 Do not delete temporary data manually while the CLIPSTER software is running The paths to the locations of the temporary data are stored i project specific in each project file With the respective project file loaded in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool their locations can be found in the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software group Project field Path for temporary data and field Path for proxy data see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide The following describes how to delete one type of temporary data only either proxy or prerendering data If you want to delete the other type of temporary data as well you have to perform the same procedure once more but this time for the other type of data e If applicable shut down the CLIPSTER software e Open a file manager e g the Windows Explorer e Select the project specific path of the desired temporary data on your video hard disk array e Delete all files and directories stored in the respective directory manually e After that either start the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and load the project s in question or perform the same procedure again for the other type of data When the project s is are loaded the CLIPSTER Edit Tool recognizes that the temporary data is no lo
176. ender jobs window will be opened During the rendering the down convert ed images of the proxy will be stored in a reserved location for proxies on the video hard disk array cific meaning for each project in a different storage location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 G It is best to handle and administer the proxy data project spe Once the respective render operation shows that it is finished 100 complete the Render jobs window will be closed and you can be gin to work with the proxy It is already active in the bin and ready to be used After a proxy generation save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved again after creating proxies the proxy files will not be recognized by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for the project nor can they be deleted via the software They have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Manually on page A 14 Activating or Deactivating Proxies The created proxy substitutes the original high resolution material on the hard disks to make the environment of CLIPSTER real time capable By activating or deactivating the proxies the usage of the proxies in stead of the original material is determined When a proxy is activated the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline will show
177. ent directly to the external application where it can be processed Once the changes are saved the material can be immediately accessed via the old bin clip in CLIPSTER However due to the destructive export your original source material on the video hard disk array will be lost PVs The Control Area 5 5 The Trim Mode E With the trim mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can change the in and outpoint of adjacent clips to a cutting point for example if there are not enough head and tail available for a transition When a transition is already applied to the cutting point the in and outpoint of the clips can be changed in this mode as well You can also change in and outpoints of clips with their re spective representations in the timeline directly see section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 As soon as two clips are present in the video track s of the timeline the trim mode can be activated via its button from the controls see section Controls on page 5 11 Then the control area changes its appear ance and you will see something like the following Figure 5 18 The trim mode When the trim mode is activated the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will automat ically jump to the nearest cutting point of the timeline and the timeline cursor will be positioned there accordingly If the Edit Tool positions the timeline cursor on another cutting point than the desired one move it to the correct one with the
178. er 7 This chapter explains and describes the timeline element properties of video clips and transi tions Individual effects that a video clip may provide are explained as well Chapter 8 Provides information about the individual menu options of the menu bar of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool 1 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Appendix Gives additional information about the soft ware Among others you can find here a glos sary of terms used in this user guide and the file formats that are supported by the CLIPSTER software Index This chapter facilitates the search for specific terms 1 2 Target Group 1 4 To use this user guide and the CLIPSTER Edit Tool correctly you should have experience in PC handling and be familiar with the hardware handling of a video system If you want to use the software to its full potential you should also have extensive knowledge in the field of dig ital video Furthermore to use the video system in connection with other equip ment e g a VTR you should know how to handle this equipment PVs Introduction 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide The following typographical conventions will be used in this documen tation e Texts preceded by this symbol describe activities that you must per form in the order indicated Texts preceded by this symbol are parts of a list Texts preceded by this symbol are general notes intended to fa c
179. er edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to en large or reduce the timeline area The size of the tool and control area together with its video overlay will adjust itself automatically Delete Figure 6 4 Adjusting the size of the timeline area If you pull the edge completely down the timeline area can be i hidden Then only the sliders to change the view of the timeline will still be visible and usable You can also pull the edge com pletely up to hide the tool and control area In the same way you can adjust the size of the audio track area Take the edge directly above the audio tracks and move it up or down If you pull the edge completely down the audio tracks will be hidden If you pull it farthest up you can hide the video track s The Timeline Video and Audio Track Properties Via the SETTINGS button you can alter the size and number of video and audio tracks It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find in the Options area further optional settings To the left you can find settings to alter the size and number of the video and audio tracks in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections see section Further Audio Configu rations on page 6 17 section Loading and Apply
180. erform the following iJ Audio clips provide the same trim and play out possibilities as video clips The contents of the audio clip will be played out at channel 1 and 2 of the digital audio outputs If these are routed to the analog outputs you can hear the clip at these outputs as well see section Configuring the Video and Audio Out put on page 6 12 EHE H With these buttons you can step one frame sam ple for or backwards in the scrub bar of the bin clip The scrub bar cursor will move accordingly pangus With this button you can play out the bin clip backwards i e it will start a reverse play out When a reverse play out is initiated the contents of the bin clip between the set out and inpoint will be displayed in its overlay on the left as well as at the video output of CLIPSTER In case the bin clip is an audio clip it cannot be played out in reverse Once activated the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the reverse play out you have to click it again CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs With this button you can play out the bin clip in real time When a play out is initiated the contents of the bin clip between the set in and outpoint will be displayed in its overlay on the left as well as at the video output of CLIPSTER If the bin clip is an audio clip the contents of the audio clip will be played out at channel 1 and 2 of the digital audio outputs of CLIPSTER If t
181. es a user interface where you have several color vectors and color wheels at your disposal oo 00 00 100 00 Figure 7 20 2nd color correction operator This section explains in detail the usage and the items of the secondary color correction 7 10 1 Usage of the Secondary Color Correction When applying the secondary color correction to a video clip you can adjust one color value or color range in the images of this clip without affecting any other colors The following provides information on the steps necessary to use the secondary color correction of CLIPSTER Selection of a Color Vector First when using the secondary color correction you have to select a color vector from the provided list to the left color vector list It will afterwards hold your data of the selected color or color range as well as the information about the performed color correction CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The CLIPSTER software provides overall seven predefined color vectors One that has all colors selected and six others that provide each a dif ferent color by default red green blue yellow cyan and magenta Tolerances and softness are also predefined in these vectors When ap plying a secondary color correction in many cases the usage of one of these six predefined color vectors will be suffice Nevertheless each of the provided vectors can be used and adapted to define your color or color range and every one may hold
182. es the CLIPSTER software After that you can for example shut down the video system PVs The Menus 8 3 The Edit Menu The menu Edit provides functions to aid you in your editing process In detail it contains the menu options shown below Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctri Y Figure 8 6 The Edit menu They are described in the following sections 8 3 1 Undo Undo Ctrl The menu option Undo allows to undo your latest timeline related ac tion When this option is selected the timeline will be restored to the state before your last timeline operation 8 3 2 Redo The Redo menu option will reverse the action performed via the Undo menu option see section Undo on page 8 23 To redo an action se lect this menu option 8 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 4 The Bin Menu The menu Bin provides several functions to facilitate your work with the bin In detail it contains the menu options shown below Import Bin Ctrl Shitt l Export Bin Ctrl Shift E Clear Bin Check Bin Ctrl Shitt kK Activate all proxies Deactivate all proxies Figure 8 7 The Bin menu They will be described in detail in the following sections 8 4 1 Import Bin Import Bin Ctrl Shift 8 24 With the menu option Import Bin you can import the bin of another project into your currently active project The selection of this menu op tion opens a standard dialog window for a file sel
183. escending order By repeating the last step you can sort the list of clips by up to three criteria and the whole sorting will also be available when switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again Sorting Clips into Folders As soon as clips are present in the bin you can sort them into previously created folders see section Creating Folders on page 4 18 to keep your project file in order and thus to perform a clip and project man agement e To sort the clips into folders simply select the clips in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop them to the respective folder in the folder area They are then present in this folder and you can view them again in the contents area when the folder is selected from the folder area f e If you drag and drop the clips while the Ctrl key is pressed J the clips will be copied instead of moved Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes To begin an editing process you have to use the clips of the bin and drag and drop them either to the control area or directly to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool If a clip is shown in the contents area of the bin in the thumbnail view you can use the scrub bar below each thumbnail to preview the mate rial and roughly select an inpoint for the respective clip The feature to select an inpoint can be enabled or disabled via i the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER When disabled every time you add a clip to the timeline of the CLIPSTE
184. et a timeline offset for example to match the current project with other projects you have to use the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool There you can set in the group Timecode the offset for the timecode see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information The timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will then provide this timecode off set This setting can also be configured with the TC Start item of i the output settings window see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 13 Additionally the timeline scale as well as all position and length indica tors in the CLIPSTER software can be switched from a display of the timecode notation to frame numbers and vice versa For this it is best to use the context menu of a timecode frame number field for exam ple the position field of the timeline cursor see section Controls on page 5 11 Figure 6 10 Context menu of a position field Select from the context menu the respective menu option This will change the timeline scale as well as the position and length indicators of the whole CLIPSTER software package to the selected notation To switch between timecode and frame notation you can also i use the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Config S urations user guide for more information PVs The Timeline 6 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips of Clips All clips added to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool i e video as well as a
185. ete from in to out The menu option Delete from in to out will be available as soon as an in and outpoint of the timeline are set CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A O g1 40 21 Add marker m Remove maker n HOLLYWOOD YAmefican Dow SSSA ane Match frame Delete from in to out X 01 20269 Figure 6 38 Deleting timeline elements from a timeline range This will delete all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timeline If appropriate the elements will be cut at the position of the in outpoint Whether a gap occurs in this part of the timeline or the rest of the timeline is moved to the left to stay in direct connection with all previous timeline elements depends on the insert overwrite mode of the timeline area see also section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 When a track is locked see sec tion Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 its timeline elements are not deleted 6 4 8 Performing a Cut 6 40 Once at least one clip is present in the video or audio tracks of the time line you can cut the clip at a desired position For this perform the fol lowing e Move the timeline cursor to the desired position in the timeline as described in section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 vides a frame end marker that indicates where the selected frame ends in the timeline see also section Moving via the Timeline Scale on page 6 25 This may help y
186. etme ee ree en Treen ere 6 21 DelObe ssc cccsacatcsedsessaaseess 6 20 6 28 Edit ccvledentsesedaneitoes cascclsanhiaagen 2 9 edit mode ecc 5 11 end Of CMO miasssssasinersanerusaessors 5 18 frame backward seene 5 12 frame forward nace 5 12 frame sample backward 5 17 frame sample forward 5 17 O eee ee ener Et 2 9 POS reds casiecianseaintetarereredeavweaens 4 7 NpOINt nonini 5 20 6 29 Insert siapatejaiessncectenioiecemmnssens 6 32 INVE scssi e a 7 35 Eae E A 5 19 7 35 Map To File ssiriiiissiisirissisn 4 44 Mark All aeee 4 44 Modify after neccen 7 4 Modify all Laaa 7 4 Modify before n 7 4 Monitoring cecer 6 18 next cutting point 3 13 5 13 of timeline tracks ssasecceexetecezatss 3 10 OU pOINt cccvecstsces oesecsca 5 20 6 29 Overwrite scssi bi dia 6 32 Pipette sioiias 7 28 7 35 Play conaran 5 12 5 18 previous cutting point 3 13 5 13 Reset naian 4 42 7 4 7 35 7 40 reverse play senazcnensensevens 5 12 5 17 KAUA css ccececssecectccetenerecetendes 5 13 er eee ye ee eee 7 23 Settings 3 7 3 10 6 7 6 13 6 17 6 19 6 20 Slave Mode scce 5 11 source edit mode 5 11 5 15 start of clip ssssssbssaseavevavavgusaiyart 5 18 Text eneee enera 4 6 WANS ssdeisfatescssdeeteasdaces 3 13 6 41 PVs Index trim ACK WANE 2acscc resisted 5 26 prerendering s s 6 42 trim forward ccceeeeeeeee eee 5 28 properties 2 5 3 6 4 24 6 55 7 9 trim mode accen 5 11 real t
187. ext menu Afterwards select the menu option Remove marker to delete it from the timeline You also have the possibility at hand to remove all timeline markers in one step from the timeline For this select the menu option Remove all markers from the context menu The appearance of timeline markers can be configured to your i liking with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 6 4 14 Attaching an Audio Clip to a Video Clip 6 50 Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for instance if they are already perfectly aligned and in syn chronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach an audio to a video clip When attaching more than two timeline elements you can at li tach one video clip to several audio clips only It is not possible to attach several video clips to one or more audio clips Further more it is not possible to attach clips of one type only e g au dio clips only How to Attach Clips To attach an audio clip to a video clip perform the following e Select a video clip and an audio clip in the timeline area with the mouse while you hold down the Ctrl key The Timeline e Afterwards release the Ctrl key and call up on one of the selected clips or on an empty part of the timeline the context menu usually with a right click of the mouse e On the context menu select the menu option Attach
188. f the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Further Audio Con figurations on page 6 17 and section Cropping the Time line on page 6 20 Cropping Cropping zr 3D LUT D LUT 3D LUT a management Audio Scrubbing Monitoring Figure 6 18 Items to load a 3D LUT file After clicking on the button 3D LUT a window opens to load a 3D LUT file and create a profile for it 3D LUT Management LUT Profiles Add Custom Name File incl Path Figure 6 19 3D LUT file management To load and administer available 3D LUT files the window provides the following items LUT Profiles In the list box LUT Profiles you can see a list of all already specified 3D LUT file profiles Each entry in this box represents one 3D LUT file Se lect from this list box one entry for instance to change its settings to delete it or to enable it 6 19 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs ADD Once a valid 3D LUT file is selected and a profile name is entered you can add it to the list box above with the button ADD Because one 3D LUT file can be applied to one profile only with this button you can also change the name of an already created profile or assign another file to it DELETE With the button DELETE you can delete an al ready specified 3D LUT file profile from the list box Simply select an entry from the list box and press this button to delete it Custom Name In the entry field Custom Name y
189. f in and outpoints in the timeline tracks can be used for alltimeline elements i e video clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions For a frame accurate trimming of the in and outpoints you may also use the appropriate keyboard shortcuts such as M trim by ten frames and trim by one frame af ter the selection of the in outpoint handler see also section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 5 They can be used in the trim mode of the control area as well as in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool How to Change In Outpoints with the Trim Mode With the trim mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can change the in and outpoint of adjacent video clips to a cutting point You can activate the trim mode with its button from the controls of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool NH see section Controls on page 5 11 When the trim mode is activated the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will automat ically jump to the nearest cutting point in the video track s and the timeline cursor will be positioned accordingly Furthermore the control area then displays two video overlays The left one shows the last frame of the clip left to the cut while the right one displays the inpoint and first frame of the clip to the right You can then use the trim mode to change the in and outpoint easily The Timeline e Select the in outpoint handler in the scrub bar below each video overlay with the mouse and move it to the des
190. f the CLIPSTER software in general Here you can find the following menu options Figure 8 2 The menu of the CLIPSTER icon They are described in the following sections 8 1 1 Minimize ine To reduce the CLIPSTER software to a button on the taskbar of the Windows operating system click the Minimize menu option on the menu of the CLIPSTER icon You can then for instance access other programs that are installed on your video system 8 1 2 Exit The menu option Exit ends the current CLIPSTER Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole CLIPSTER software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or a play out operation beforehand Otherwise the re spective task may get interrupted This closes the CLIPSTER software After that you can for example shut down the video system 8 2 PVs The Menus 8 2 The Project Menu The menu Project contains the following menu options New Ctrl N Open Cti 0 Recent files Insert Project Cti S Update CineReel Export EDL Finalize Prerender all Clean temp dir xit Figure 8 3 The Project menu They are in detail described in the following sections 8 2 1 New Ctrl N The menu option New on the Project menu opens a new project file in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Once the new project file is loaded you can begin your new project for insta
191. f the im age for the respective color component red green or blue With the master slider RGB to the left you can set the settings for all three color components at once even after already adjusting individual color com ponents 7 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The check box Hold Luma allows you to hold the luminance level of the clip while adjusting a single color component Usually while adjust ing a color component the luminance of the clip is changed as well i e changes occur in the Brightness setting too When this check box is activated during the adjustment of a color component e g G instead of adjusting the brightness parameter the luminance of the image is set via the remaining two values R and B which will be set according to your changes while the luminance level is preserved 7 9 4 Lift Gamma Gain 7 26 To the right of the Global items you can find the Lift Gamma and Gain items where you can adjust the individual color components in more detail This area provides the same sliders as the previously de scribed ones but for further accuracy they are split into the three con trast shades lift gamma and gain Lift Gamma Gain RGB RGB RGB 00 00 1 000 00 00 R R R 00 00 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 000 00 00 B B B 00 00 1 000 00 00 Figure 7 19 The detailed color settings Use the sliders the same way as described for the global color settings Then you can set the values for ea
192. for the respective clips and your output settings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay Further information about how to set the video output raster can be found in section Con figuring the Video and Audio Output on page 6 12 This section describes the possibilities of the video overlay in detail 5 1 1 Configuring the Video Overlay 5 2 The video overlay can be configured to your liking You can adjust the safety areas as well as the size of the overlay The video overlay provides action safety and title safety areas that can be turned off or adjusted to your personal needs You can set the color as well as the sizes of these areas safety J Figure 5 2 The video overlay PVs The Control Area This can be done with the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool Please refer to the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for further information Furthermore you can adjust the size of the video overlay with the edg es of the control area at its very bottom and to the left Simply enlarge or reduce the area by dragging the edges see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 3 5 1 2 The Video Scopes To monitor color corrections and to make sure that the images comply with broadcast standards the video overlay of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool provides video scopes to help you during such tasks With them you can view the material image for image if necessary and assess the d
193. form the following e Select the second clip in the timeline clip A with a click of the mouse Because in the previous step we have altered the properties of a transi tion the area of the timeline element properties is already visible below the timeline area As soon as the clip is selected it will show you imme diately its properties If the timeline element properties area is not visible perform a i double click on the clip in the timeline or select the menu op tion Show Properties of its context menu The effects operator Zoom Pan is by default available and active for all video clips in the timeline and thus is already available in the effects list of the timeline element properties e Next activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool restoration Figure 3 13 Selection of an effects operator The tool area displays all available effects operators on your video sys tem With a click of the mouse on the little plus or minus sign right in front of a folder entry or by double clicking an entry directly you can expand or collapse the operators sorted under this folder e Select from the folder colorcorrection the operator for the primary color correction 1st Color Correction and drag and drop it to the Effects list of the timeline element properties 3 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Effects Lock Figure 3 14 Drag and drop of effect This will apply the
194. format If the wav file format were selected for our first example above it would lead to the following out put lt Path entry field gt _ lt File entry field gt lt File entry field gt _0000 lt File entry field gt _ lt Channels gt 0 wav lt File entry field gt _0001 S lt File entry field gt _ lt Channels gt 1 wav lt Path entry field gt and lt File entry field gt are place holders for the contents of the respective entry fields in the Finalizing window For further information on the stor ing of finalized files see section Storage Information on page 8 12 The place holder lt Cchannels gt indicates the se lected audio channels of the area Channels For each enabled check box one file will be created iJ If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win dows Media you will receive a single file only that contains both audio and video CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The audio files are stored in their respective frames subdirectory For each 20 000 frames the CLIPSTER Edit Tool generates an extra subdi rectory to store the image files because Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are stored in one directory In each of these subdirectories the matching set of audio files is stored meaning the au dio files are appropriately cut to match the 20 000 frames of video If no video finalization was selected all audio files will be stor
195. forward Trim by one 1 frame backward L CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Action Shortcut Trim by ten 10 frames forward Trim by ten 10 frames backward M Additionally the following keyboard actions and shortcuts may be helpful Action Key Action Select several clips and or transi tions disjointedly Hold Ctrl key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Select a range of adjoining clips and or transitions Hold Shift key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Frame accurate trimming Hold Shift while trimming Copy bin clip to a folder of the bin instead of moving Hold Ctrl while drag and drop the clip with the mouse Copy selected elements to the clip Ctrl C board Cut selected elements to the clip Ctrl X board Paste from clipboard to the selected Ctrl V position location Open Windows Explorer Windows 9 El Open Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del Switch to Windows desktop Windows 4 D Switch to another program Alt TAB Dvs Appendix A 3 Supported File Formats The tables in this section list the video and audio file formats that are supported by CLIPSTER First the video file formats are listed followed by a table of the audio file formats Table A 1 Supported video file formats
196. frame of each clip and each audio file is present 8 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs on the video system If inconsistencies are found i e missing files you will get the following error message Bin consistency check No source material found for the following Clips list of clips gt Delete these clips Ignore Figure 8 8 Error message of inconsistencies in the bin The error message provides a detailed list of all clips that could not be verified With the button DELETE THESE CLIPS you can then delete the missing clips from your bin or you can proceed to the inconsistent bin with the button IGNORE Missing frames in between the first and the last frame of a clip i will be substituted during a play out by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool with a standard image automatically see section Consisten cies of Clips on page 6 56 8 4 5 Generate proxies Generate proxies 8 26 For each clip available in the bin that may exceed the real time capabil ity of CLIPSTER you can create a proxy to ensure a real time capable environment In case the bin contains several clips that you want to cre ate proxies of you can use the menu option Generate proxies to cre ate them all in one step Alternatively you can use the menu option Create proxy on i the context menu of a clip in the bin It will create a proxy for the clip only where the context menu was invoked Further information about proxies in
197. frames image files Dvs Appendix A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts For a more easy and a faster control of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool there are various keyboard shortcuts available which are listed in the table below Action Shortcut Play speed 1 Space 5 Stop speed 0 Space K Shift K Increase speed by 1 L Increase speed by 0 1 Shift L Decrease speed by 1 D Decrease speed by 0 1 Shift J Step one 1 frame forward Right Arrow 4 Step one 1 frame backward Left Arrow 3 Step ten 10 frames forward 2 Shift Left Arrow Step ten 10 frames backward 1 Shift Right Arrow Jump to project begin Pos 1 Jump to project end End Go to previous cutting point A Ctrl Left Arrow Go to next cutting point S Ctrl Right Arrow Activate insert mode V Activate overwrite mode B Add edit cutting point Shift H Set timeline inpoint E 1 Set timeline outpoint R O Set timeline in and outpoint refer T ence cutting points of current clip Delete timeline inpoint D Delete timeline outpoint F Delete timeline in and outpoint G Go to timeline inpoint Q Go to timeline outpoint W Add timeline marker Shift N Zoom into timeline Up Arrow Zoom out of timeline Down Arrow Trim by one 1 frame
198. ge Remark Hue 0 360 Settings in degrees of a color wheel 0 360 shade of red 90 shade of cyan 180 shade of green 270 shade of magenta blue lilac Timeline Element Properties Setting Range Remark Saturation 0 100 Percentage value where O indicates no satu ration and 100 full saturation Luminance O 100 Percentage value where O indicates no lumi nance black and 100 full luminance The same restrictions as with the corner points of the selection shapes apply to the settings in the entry fields The softness area settings may lie outside of the vector area settings but not within EJ Color Mask Controls With the controls of the color mask area you can open the preview win dow as well as switch between the various views of it Additionally you can lock invert or reset your current settings or adjust an overall soft ness for them Pipette Lock Invert Re Soft 50 00 Figure 7 29 Color mask controls In detail they provides the following control elements PIPETTE The PIPETTE button will show you the image currently selected by the timeline cursor in a preview window Af ter pressing this button the preview window is displayed on the screen and the button a P is switched on auto matically Further information about the preview win dow and its different views can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 36 LOCK The button Lock prohibits
199. general and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 25 This will open the Render jobs windows i e one window for each render job will be opened successively and the down converted images of the proxies will be rendered from the original high resolution mate rial The down converted images will be stored in a reserved location for proxies on the video hard disk array f It is best to handle and administer the proxy data project spe Li cific meaning for each project in a different storage location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 S 8 4 6 Delete proxies The Menus Once the last render operation is finished you can begin to work with the proxies The created proxies will already be activated in the bin and ready to be used After a proxy generation save your project file If an already A saved project file is not saved again after creating proxies the proxy files will not be recognized by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for the project nor can they be deleted via the software They have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Manually on page A 14 When you are finished with your editing work using the proxies you might want to dispose of them i e delete them from th
200. ght of the deinterlace operator s setting pane the settings can be refined Delnterlace threshold Motion threshold This slider sets the deinterlacing threshold for the selected methods It is used to detect whether in terlacing is present in the images Decrease this parameter in case moving objects in your preren dered result still contain some interlacing effects The lower the value the more pixels are deinter laced This slider sets the motion threshold for the select ed methods It is used to detect the moving re gions within an image Decreasing the value applies the deinterlacing to a larger area in the im ages Use this parameter in case interlacing effects are still visible in your prerendered results The Menus At the top of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool module you can see a menu bar menu bar Figure 8 1 Menu bar of CLIPSTER Edit Tool This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administra tive nature to the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options generally concerned with projects and project files This chapter describes the menu bar of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool user in terface All menus and menu options will be explained 8 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 8 1 The Menu of the CLIPSTER Icon The CLIPSTER icon on the menu bar of the user interface provides menu options to control the user interface o
201. h the with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information This field either shows the timecode or the frame number of the current position of the timeline cur sor If you want to move to a certain position on the timeline you can enter the position here When this field is set to timecode viewing enter the appropri ate timecode when in frame number viewing en ter the respective frame number After that press Enter and the timeline cursor will move to the en tered position The timecode format is hh mm ss hours minutes seconds and frame number Neverthe less the last colon may be displayed in the software as a full stop indicating that currently the drop frame timecode feature is activated Then the time code fields of the software will display for example 12 25 07 instead of 12 25 07 When entering timecode you may use either colons or full stops both will serve as separators for the entered time code Further information about the drop frame iJ timecode feature can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs When entering timecode you may also omit digits if you enter less information the entered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last num ber is the frame the next the seconds etc Every digit omitted between the colons full stops is as sumed to be a leading ze
202. hane caccat 8 25 configuration accz ices eterssss 3 4 4 5 contents area 3 3 4 5 4 20 context menu contents area 4 20 context menu folder area 4 18 context menu title bar 4 5 copying clips xscassavdaaxtens 4 22 4 23 creating a folder 4 9 4 18 deleting a clip cccicicvertersiedieetert 4 25 deleting a folder 4 19 4 20 ORDO cciticietstinerengemetieenad 8 25 folder area a 3 3 4 4 4 17 IMPO tiroirs 8 24 inpoint setting e e 3 6 4 23 load sss sstcaradetegeed eect lasesdiered 8 24 GUC E ETT 8 25 pasting clips tecccccesstsonamcgesies 4 22 renaming a folder 4 19 selecting clips sssnnssnnnnneeee 4 21 sorting clips into folders 4 23 sorting OF clips seeren 4 22 sorting of folders n se 4 18 text only ccce 4 7 thumbnail oaase 3 5 4 13 thumbnail with text aaeeea 4 6 title bar gaan oer 4 4 4 5 4 18 view buttons n os 4 5 4 6 bin Clip sasascaisGhinariaceencatataren 5 16 A 1 brightness ns 7 24 7 29 7 40 broadcast signal legal 0 5 4 broadcast standard 5 3 l 2 button EE E EAER AA AAS 7 23 P orride 7 23 A Edit sesisicdsaiigetvestadasates 3 14 6 40 SD LUT sratine 6 19 Ae ce deceanesa se reeee cent 7 36 7 37 A a E E T 7 36 7 37 Add et ete aes 6 20 audio routing ccecce 6 14 Clear aaa eas 4 45 Config ede cee wc ote dad uae cea nsececeekeoceae 2 9 Content ossec 2 9 4 11 Create DVS Info oo 4 42 8 fe 2 4 sae eeeeene
203. has to be set to DPX The Area Video In the area Video select the video format for the ren dering of the new clip With the finalizing function of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you are able to generate video and audio files separately via the check boxes for example in case of video the check box Video output When calling the Finalizing window for the first time the items of the area Video are not available Via the check box Video output at the top of this area you can enable the items and thus decide that you want to generate a video clip If you do not want to generate a video clip but an audio clip only leave this check box un checked and activate the check box Audio output instead see section The Area Audio on page 8 17 If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win i dows Media you cannot generate audio and video sepa rately Both will automatically be included in a single file only To the right of the check box ot Video output you can find the Format combo box Here you have to select the file format Wis for your clip to be generated For a list of the supported file formats of CLIPSTER see section Sup ported File Formats on page A 7 To the right of the Format combo box there is a button E located that may get available in dependence on the selected file format With it you can set other configurations if supported by the selected format Furthermore some file formats offe
204. he right CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Items Description With these buttons you can trim the out or in point selected via the buttons OuT and IN one frame for or backwards The respective handler will move accordingly If both buttons are activat ed the out and inpoint will be both adjusted si multaneously These buttons allow you to trim the out or in lt i ae point selected via the buttons OuT and IN ten frames for or backwards The respective handler will move accordingly If both buttons are activat ed the out and inpoint will be both adjusted si multaneously 5 5 2 Setting In and Outpoint of Clips 5 28 If clips are already present in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can change their in and outpoint with the trim mode even if a transi tion is already applied to the cutting point To do this frame accurately you have various controls at hand either to monitor the trimming or to adjust it With the trim mode activated and the timeline cursor posi tioned at the desired cutting point between the clips that you would want to change perform the following spective representations in the timeline directly see section i You can also change in and outpoints of clips with their re Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 S When a transition is applied to a cutting point the in and out point can only be moved simultaneously
205. he Edit Tool of CLIPSTER the real time conforming and finishing system manufactured by DVS CLIPSTER is a powerful high resolution video workstation with enor mous flexibility especially designed to meet the demands of modern post production houses CLIPSTER offers capturing online editing and storing of digital film and audio data in one device The system performs all works in real time Video data is stored and worked with in its original uncompressed for mat independent of resolution color space and bit depth All formats and resolutions can be processed from SD up to 4K and the final result can be played out in a freely selectable format Conversions and calcu lation times for rendering processes are rarely necessary because of the high quality hardware developed by DVS Additionally up to 16 different channels of audio can be in or output by CLIPSTER and the data can be accessed and processed in the software as easily as the video material All film video and audio data are stored in the Windows file system and thus accessible right away when working with other ap plications The CLIPSTER Edit Tool is part of the CLIPSTER software package It is a module that enables you to edit your video and audio material in a freely configurable number of tracks For this clips of different formats and resolutions are added to a timeline in the same sequence as they should be played out in the end When working with video you can edit your
206. he additional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one This section describes several features of audio clips added to the audio tracks of the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool 6 6 1 The Clip s Information Audio clips in the audio tracks of the timeline provide several informa tion via their text display 14 55 933 14 59 436 14 59 3 fAudio SingSingSing 0 1 03 504 Audic Figure 6 57 Representation of audio clip The following information are provided top left Exact inpoint of clip on the timeline with the time code view of the timeline activated the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal number i e with milliseconds when the frame view is activated the inpoint will be displayed in milliseconds only 6 64 The Timeline top right Exact outpoint of the clip on the timeline minus one sample with the timecode view of the time line activated the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal number i e with milliseconds when the frame view is activated the outpoint will be displayed in milliseconds only bottom left Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path in curly brackets the audio channels streams of the clip indicating its audio mode e g 0 1 meaning a stereo stream of channel 0 and 1 or 0 0 meaning a mono stream of channel 0 bottom right Length duration of the clip z The audio mode of the
207. he ef fects list After this its effect is removed from the clip in the timeline e You may also select the effects operator i and press the Del key on you keyboard to delete it from the list Timeline Element Properties Load Preset Save Preset The Load Preset menu option enables you to load the settings of a preset effect to the respective ef fects operator After the selection of this menu op tion a dialog window opens where you have to select the wanted preset effect from a combo box Once this is confirmed with the OK button the settings of the preset effect will be applied to the selected effects operator To use this menu option there must be a i preset effect already available in the ef fects area This menu option creates a preset effect of the ef fect where the context menu was invoked After its activation a dialog window opens where you have to enter a name for the preset effect Once this is confirmed with the OK button the preset effect will be created as a subeffect under the respective effect in the tool area s effects pane Then it can be used easily to apply the same effect setting over and over again for different clips in the timeline for example with the Load Preset menu option see above CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 7 The Operator Zoom Pan The operator Zoom Pan allows to zoom pan and rotate as well as to sharpen or blur the content
208. he indicator line of the timeline scale va S yAn em indicator line Figure 6 36 A gap in the timeline Then you either have to move the other clips respectively or fill the gap by adding another clip see section Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline on page 6 37 Additionally you have the possibility at hand to close the gap automat ically When positioning the mouse cursor over a gap red line on the timeline scale it will change its appearance to a cross Then you can close the gap with a double click of the mouse The starting point of a gap as well as its end are recognized by i the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as cutting points Thus you can move frame accurately to gaps easily via the control buttons that jump to cutting points see section Controls on page 5 11 6 4 4 Selecting Clips 6 36 Clips can be selected or deselected in the timeline easily For this per form one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Some of the following procedures are restricted to their type of track i e restricted to either video or audio tracks The Timeline Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key at
209. he material There is no need to worry about your original material being in different resolutions Getting Started CLIPSTER works resolution independent and is capable of handling ma terial up to 2K in RGB 12 bit To view your project on an additionally connected monitor you have to configure the output format of the timeline according ly The setting of the output format video raster of the project can be configured with the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool first During all works with CLIPSTER your original material will nev i er be altered The clips in the CLIPSTER software are only a rep resentation of the original material on the video hard disks All editing tasks are performed virtually e Select a clip clip A in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it to the beginning of the video track Figure 3 4 Drag and drop of clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip clip A is added to the timeline However its counterpart in the bin is neither removed nor deleted It will remain there for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of the clip to the video timeline again The video clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released However when the mouse pointer reaches certain e
210. he real time capability of CLIPSTER depends to a large ex tent on the performance of the video system hardware Therefore it is recommended to terminate all other programs when working with the CLIPSTER software After copying or recording vast amounts of data to the video hard disk array it is recommended to leave the CLIPSTER soft ware running for a longer period of time e g over night without performing any real time tasks play out or record This will give the defragmentation tool of CLIPSTER time to reorganize the files on the hard disk array for an optimized real time performance For this the automatic starting of the defragmentation tool has to be enabled CLIPSTER is a very reliable software However because of the vast amount of third party software available its reactions on the installation of such could not be tested The installation of third party software may disrupt the real time capability and or limit the functionality of your CLIPSTER When working with prerendered files and timeline elements that need a prerendering it is recommended to activate the au tosave function of the CLIPSTER software and set it to a rela tively short interval Basics The CLIPSTER Edit Tool is part of the software package of CLIPSTER This chapter provides first some background information about the structure of the CLIPSTER software which includes a short overview of the different modules of the software package After th
211. heir out put in the clip to be rendered must be seen in relation to the selected video format of the new clip With the check box Auto Scale activat ed the clips of the timeline will be scaled to their maximum allowable width or height so that no information gets lost i e the images will not get cropped with this function If you leave the Auto Scale check box unchecked the material will maintain its original size Auto Scale Original Aspect Ratio x Via the check box Original Aspect Ratio the aspect ratio the relation of width x and height y of the video format can be preserved Thus the images will not get stretched or compressed More details about autoscaling in combination with aspect ra li tio can be found in the section about the video format settings described in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide The Area Audio Via the area Audio you can enable and configure the finalizing of audio Activate the check box Audio out put at the top of this area to enable the generation of an audio clip With the finalizing dialog of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can render vid eo and audio together or separately if desired Simply select the appro priate output check box compare section The Area Video on page 8 15 If a container format is selected as the file format e g win iJ dows Media you cannot generate audio and video sepa rately Both will automatically be included in a single file only
212. hese are routed to the an alog outputs you can hear the clip at these outputs as well see section Configuring the Video and Audio Output on page 6 12 After activation the button changes its appearance to its active state and you have to press it again to stop the play out To view the bin clip video on an addition i ally connected monitor you have to con figure the output format of the timeline accordingly The setting of the output for mat video raster of the project can be configured with the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 13 With the activation of a play of the bin A clip a play of the timeline will be termi nated These buttons move the scrub bar cursor to the next marked point on the scrub bar of the clip coming from the bin Marked points are the start as well as end of the timeline or the set in and out point The first button jumps to previous points of the timeline while the second button jumps to next ones PVs The Control Area With the Lock button you can synchronize the timeline cursor of the timeline with the scrub bar cursor of the bin clip Then the timeline cursor will adjust to your moves of the scrub bar cursor for example if you scrub the bin clip s scrub bar or move via the buttons to step one frame for or backwards The way the synchronization is per formed can be set wi
213. hether a defragmentation has to be performed is indicated by a spe cial assessment that evaluates the fragmentation degree of the clips on the hard disk array Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defragmenting the worst fragmented files first and align them on the hard disks so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a record In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragment ed files and so on until all data is defragmented sufficiently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragmentation is de tected once more ther close the command line window or press the key combi i To terminate the manually started defragmentation process ei nation Ctrl C x A 6 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually When working with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool temporary data may be created to ensure a real time capable environment Temporary data can be proxies and or prerendered files both usually written to locations on your video hard disk array especially reserved for this kind of data In case you are not sure whether the temporary data in these directories are necessary you can delete their whole contents manually After Appendix wards you may load your project file s again and begin new proxy generation and or prerendering processes It is recommended to perform the procedure described in the following only when you are sure that the directories for the t
214. hment and call up its context menu usually with a right click of the mouse 6 51 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 52 e Then use either one of the following menu options Disconnect ele Disconnects and severs only the selected clip from ment Disconnect group Disconnect timeline the attachment If the attachment comprises sev eral clips in the timeline i e one video clip and sev eral audio clips the rest of the attachment will be maintained Disconnects and severs the attachment of all ele ments in the group where the context menu was invoked Regardless of the number of timeline ele ments in the attachment all will be disconnected Disconnects and severs the attachments of all at tached timeline elements in the timeline in one step After that the attached clip s will be severed and disconnected In case the timeline does not contain other attachments the button for the in sert mode will be available and ready for a selection again PVs The Timeline 6 5 Working with Video Clips The CLIPSTER Edit Tool works with representations of clips in the time line only This means that as long as you perform your work on the timeline the original material on the video hard disks is maintained and never altered The appearance of the clips in the video track s of the timeline can be altered in several ways You can change the height of the track s and the display of the thumbnails You
215. i clip to the bin a i thumbnail of the multi clip will be added to the contents area of the bin as described above In addition a folder will be created in the folder area of the bin that will carry the name of the main directory and contain all individual clips as they are available in the multi clip This behav ior is useful due to the fact that contrary to vid eo multi clips you cannot change the properties of an audio multi clip via its context menu If you want to change the properties of an audio multi clip you have to change them for each clip individually in the created subfold er of the bin see section Changing the Prop erties of Clips on page 4 24 Clips of either audio or video that were not completely recorded receive this icon Then you will know that parts of this clip may be missing However you can still use them in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and perform all works with them pending clip unknown Files of an unknown type i e files where CLIPSTER is not able to deter mine whether these are audio or video files will get this icon These files can not be used in the CLIPSTER software Real time Capability of Clips With an optimized video system and a video hard disk array that incor porates fully functioning hard disks CLIPSTER can handle two data streams of film material up to 2K in RGB 12 bitin real time If you want 4 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs
216. ideo Frame The matching of an individual video frame is especially useful in case you want to know the exact position of this frame in the source material of the clip or if you want to transfer this image or the connected image sequence to another application for further processing Once the time line cursor is placed on a specific image of a video clip in the timeline you can select the menu option Match frame from the context menu of the timeline scale usually invoked with a right click of the mouse The Match frame menu option can also be found on the con text menu of a video clip Add marker Remove maker Remove all makers Match frame Delete fram in te out Figure 6 54 Matching an individual video frame 6 58 PVs The Timeline After this the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool switches to its source edit mode and the particular frame together with its clip will be made available in the video overlay to the left of this mode fHollywood HOLLYWoOp 4 I gt Delete k 00 00 Figure 6 55 The matched frame Then you can easily recognize the exact frame position in its source ma terial via the position field to the right because the scrub bar cursor will be placed accordingly Additionally the respective clip used in the time line will be marked and visible in the bin to facilitate the identification of the source material Further information about the source edit mode can be found in sec
217. ider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard shortcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change the viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Via the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Con i figurations user guide you can set the way the CLIPSTER Edit Tool performs a zooming on the timeline There you can set whether the zooming should occur on the position of the time line cursor or on the current viewing position of the timeline The cursor of the timeline provides a special feature when zoomed far into the timeline Then it provides a frame end marker which indicates where this particular image ends in the timeline HOLLY WOO p OLLY WOO p HOLLY WOO p line of timeline cursor frame end marker Figure 6 30 Timeline cursor when zoomed into the timeline As you can see in the figure above the frame selected with the cursor is the 8th frame of the 12th second and it ends where the 9th frame starts The frame end marker is very useful when you want to perform frame accurate cuts or other edit works Moving via the Scrub Bar of the Control A
218. if ferent color values if needed prior to processing as well as afterwards The scopes can be activated via the context menu of the video overlay RGB parade YUV parade Wav Figure 5 3 The context menu of the video overlay CLIPSTER offers various scopes to choose from Among them you can find waveform vectorscope and parade monitors Once one of the available video scopes is selected the control area will change its ap pearance and two items will be displayed the left one shows the select ed video scope while the right one displays the video overlay as usual 5 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 4 Figure 5 4 Video scope in control area Nevertheless with the menu option Above overlay available on the context menu of the control area this layout can be altered When the menu option is deactivated the scope and the overlay are displayed separately in the control area when activated the selected video scope will be superimposed on the video overlay Figure 5 5 RGB parade superimposed on video overlay Most video scopes provide in its graph an indication of the headroom In case your project has to provide a legal broadcast signal no color component should reach into that area When staying on the computer side and working with RGB material the headroom may be disregard ed f Further information about color spaces headroom and full val Li ue ranges as well as color space conversion
219. ilitate work and help avoid errors You must pay particular attention to text that follows this symbol to avoid errors u m Texts enclosed by quotation marks are references to other man uals guides chapters or sections Window Text in bold with single quotation marks indi cates a window name Group Menu Text in italic and bold indicates either a group name menu name or options in a menu list Menu Option In the specified group or menu select the stated item BUTTON Text in small caps and bold indicates push but tons Item Text in bold only stands for other labelled items of the user interface File Directory structure or file Entries Parameters selections or entries made in the program Key An individual key or a key combination on a keyboard Keyboard Shortcuts To perform options or procedures with the keyboard often requires si multaneous pressing of two keys Example Ctrl F1 If this is given hold down the Ctrl key and press simultaneously the F1 key 1 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 1 4 1 6 Important Notes Please observe the following while using the CLIPSTER Edit Tool gt E gt be te gt Only use the designated video drive disk stripe set to store video and audio data Other storage locations will be too slow for real time operations Leave about 15 of the overall video hard disk capacity emp ty of data for real time performance reasons T
220. ill bring an other selector to the foreground This is the high tone selector It will adjust the brighter colors of the selected color vector while the luminance remains constant This is the mid tone selector It will adjust the aver age colors of the selected color vector This is the low tone selector It will adjust the dark er colors of the selected color vector while the lu minance remains constant When positioning a tone selector in the color circle it will cause a color correction of the respective tones towards the color the selector is dragged to The farther away from the center the selector is positioned the more the saturation of that particular color increases For example if an image is too blue then you would drag one or all three selectors in the opposite direction of that color toward yellow In case you want to pronounce a color you would add more of the same color by drag ging the selectors toward the side of the circle that provides this color 7 39 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 7 40 Additional Controls The additional controls of the color correction and balance area are lo cated to the right of the color wheel and below it Most of them provide the controls for a color correction With them you can alter for exam ple the hue of the chosen color vector or other properties such as brightness or saturation Because the controls i e the sliders to the right of the color wheel p
221. im mode The in and outpoint information are provided either in timecode or in frame notation depending on your selected viewing mode of the time line see section Configuring the Timeline Scale on page 6 10 5 5 1 The Trim Controls In addition to the in and outpoint information and the overlays where you can see the end and start frame of the clips the control area in the trim mode provides the following elements to control a trimming frame accurately When a transition is applied to a cutting point the in and out i point can only be moved simultaneously i e regardless wheth er you want to change a single in or outpoint only the other one will be adjusted accordingly as well The information or entry fields provided by the control area in the trim mode can be switched between a timecode and a frame notation via their context menu see section Configur ing the Timeline Scale on page 6 10 5 26 The Control Area Items Description Blue bar The blue bar between the two overlays represents the cut between the two clips It can be selected with the mouse and when moving the mouse cur sor to the left or right you can trim the out and inpoint of the two clips adjacent to the cutting point simultaneously Thereby you will extend the length of one clip while shortening the length of the other at the same time With this kind of trim ming the total timeline length is maintained The i
222. image Source Image Figure 7 22 Alpha channel view of the selected color vector In the alpha channel view of the preview window the black parts of the image will not be affected while all areas and pixels displayed in white will be color corrected The set color vector will be graphically shown in the color wheel to the left of the color mask area Although the preview window and the use of the pipette is the easiest way to determine a col or vector it can also be adjusted with the color grey scale bars and the entry fields to the right as well as the controls at the bottom of the color mask area Further information about the color mask area with the preview win dow and all other items and controls can be found in section The Color Mask Area on page 7 31 Once everything is set correctly you can change or correct the selected color vector Color Correction After the color vector is set and determined you can start to color cor rect it You can either alter the hue of the chosen color s or other prop erties such as brightness or saturation In other words to correct a color vector all settings of a primary color correction are at your disposal For this you have to use the settings items and color wheel to the right of the secondary color correction properties color correction and balance area The applied color correction will be shown in the preview window in its source view as well as on the video over
223. ime capability 2 11 4 15 4 48 Unmark All cen 4 45 selecting in bin ceeecevtetccsccese nets 4 21 Update sirsiran inina 4 41 selecting in timeline 6 36 NOMI neccen 6 66 sorting in bin ocsscccccsccccen 4 22 Wave sieiriiiiicrin aieiaa 6 68 sorting into folder ee 4 23 source 5 22 5 24 6 54 6 58 6 59 Cc text information 6 53 6 64 time stretching compression 6 55 capacity Storage ccccecesseeseeees 1 6 6 57 CAPLUNNE f22syecescostiedieacteteanes 2 3 4 13 tooltip 6 54 6 55 6 65 6 66 change contents of timeline 6 62 tooltip configuration 6 11 chapter Overview ccccceeeeseeeseeees 1 3 TRINA oeeie 5 28 6 47 ee 4 38 4 39 TYPOS oe eseesereereeesecseeeeeeeteeteens 4 13 controls cceccccccccccceecees 4 38 4 41 UNKNOWN 2 cc ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 resolution eceeeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeees 4 41 VIED iativerniaainacaearonbnsads 4 13 6 53 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 24 8 25 yellow marking EA EN 4 16 Chroma nosssieireererierirrrerrrrerrrrrerrns 5 5 clipboard 4 22 6 37 6 56 6 66 CineReel sscdiscsajucassceaccdivedexanssavsage 8 6 CLIPSTER sss csesccsnecccessecsccessecesecn 1 1 clear bin ccecce 8 25 Configuration Tool 2 4 2 9 8 30 alo a A E ccace ech a eaeee A 1 8 31 8 32 add to bin ccce 3 4 4 7 Content Browser 2 4 2 9 4 11 add to timeline 3 7 6 2 Content Scanner ccc
224. in window of the CLIPSTER software CANCEL With this button you can close the window to ex port an EDL without creating it You will then re turn to the main window of the CLIPSTER software Time stretching or compression information will not be ob served during the creation of the EDL see section Time Stretching or Compression of Video Clips on page 6 57 a 8 2 9 Finalize The Finalize menu option generates a new clip from your project s timeline while the original material is not touched or altered i e the original data and also the project file are preserved Via this option you have the possibility to select the video and or audio format freely Ad ditionally you may limit the rendering of the timeline with a defined in and or outpoint of the timeline or render video and audio separately After the selection of the menu option Finalize the window Final izing will be displayed on the screen CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Finalizing 8 12 Figure 8 5 Window to finalize a project Storage Information In the entry field Path you have to state the storage path where to store the new clip You may also click on the button to the right of this entry field E to select an already existing directory or create a new direc tory via the provided buttons of the opening dialog window Notation drive_letter directory subdirectory Instead of the backslash you may als
225. ine to start your editing work The CLIPSTER Edit Tool will use the selected inpoint as the starting point of your clip if this feature is enabled However if you drag a video clip from the bin to the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the soft ware switches to the source edit mode where you can select the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately before adding it to the timeline see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 Changing the Properties of Clips In the bin you can call up the properties of clips Then you can for ex ample assign flags to clips or change their properties such as their names or video formats Use the opening window to change the clip s properties if CLIPSTER does not recognize its video or audio format cor rectly e Call up the context menu on a clip present in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Properties This will open the Clip properties window where you can change the clip s properties 7n Some clip properties can only be altered if the clip is not already i present in the timeline Furthermore contrary to video the properties of audio multi clips cannot be changed You have to change them individually by selecting the properties of each audio clip in the provided bin subfolder of the audio multi clip The description of the Clip properties window is not part of this user guide It is in detail described in the CLIPSTER Con figurations user
226. ing a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 and section Cropping the Time line on page 6 20 Track Size Tracks Small 48 27 Small 37 Figure 6 5 Track size options With the fields for the track sizes you can adjust the height of the tracks for video and audio separately Either change the sizes by selecting one of the preset sizes from the combo boxes to the left Sma11 Medium Large or enter the pixel height manually in the adjoining entry fields Individual track sizes can also be configured for each track in i the timeline area manually see section Changing Track Sizes Manually on page 6 8 However as soon as you confirm your video format settings at any time afterwards the manu ally changed track sizes will be set back to the values config ured in the Options area Additionally you can find here to the right entry fields where you can set the amount of audio and video tracks that will be visible in the time 6 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs line area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Up to 99 audio and video tracks each can be displayed and used in the CLIPSTER software Working with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is i different from the usual approach of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the different tracks of the timeline form a stack Further information about this and how to work with vertical editing can be found in section Vertical Editing of Video Clips
227. ings ccc 7 25 apea mE 7 24 Nieran eee 7 25 li eee e e eer 7 26 LOW origenes 7 25 LUT file specification A 10 master luma chroma se 7 23 saturation cercen 7 25 setting of static LUT s n 7 22 Static LUT sisiiisei srining 3 15 7 9 priority vertical editing 6 62 program exit 3 18 8 2 8 2 program start siecss cceratin eco esedes 3 2 project configuration e s 8 29 create EDU oorner 8 7 WIS E a 2c yendececevensdectaseeccbsasteeasceeca 8 5 management eccerre 2 14 project file nene 8 3 8 5 PVs Index TINEA E iiia 8 6 RGB parade seeren 5 6 Information cecce 2 10 root folder bin nccc 4 19 4 20 INSerE dex dec eteeetiiud da heslociatatesaiestes 8 5 rotatjoN caceeedieidecerctecesacceiecccdictaads 7 18 oh E E 8 3 SEttINgS ae en ee emer 7 19 PEN Deere Terr renee eee a 8 4 8 5 RS 422 isis sisnnsoradosanitnataaernone 5 11 YEGEN E Seen eee eee ee eee 8 5 SAVE poeclgrcntedesciesaiieneedaiedeuedend 8 6 S status MeSSAZES icce 2 10 project management 2 14 safety areas cenere 5 2 properties sample ACCESSING icce 7 2 forward backward ooann 5 17 CIOS NE aree ie a a 7 5 saturation 5 5 7 25 7 29 7 35 7 40 of clips EET 2 5 3 6 4 24 6 55 save Of transitions ssesseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 ee eee eee rere 8 25 of video clips E E ET TE 7 9 default configuration SSE E 8 31 timeline elements 0 0eee 7 1 preset effects ccccccceeeeeees 4 33 PIOXY oe
228. inimize sesssiiiieessiririresrrrireresrrirressrrrrireeerrrre 8 2 Contents S k2 EXIT S a ceesicatteacter genes 8 2 8 2 The Project Menu go cice ccc aiace esate tcutacectatenintetastexasbee aicseeeessnict 8 3 82 1 NEW sirieias riaa orita 8 3 8 2 2 Opele soian alt aaah cee oleae e tami N e a aaa 8 4 8 2 3 Recent files ac essans Seas steareacacetentec es cectenbachedciadiaiaceszasbabeg 8 5 8 24 Insert Proj Ct s cathettaccncsseaneecttenusenncthate teattaesasancnet 8 5 SAD SNE a ee E er er eee eee 8 6 8 26 SWEN Sus sorire Oe ee eee errr arrana i Tie 8 6 8 2 7 Update CineReel eeeseesssssrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrreesrrrernrrnrrn 8 6 82 8 Export EDL a iiiaio iiia a a a 8 7 8 219 FINAlZE i areire an a r i a a a a 8 11 8 2 10 Prerender all ceecee 8 20 8 2 11 Clean temp dir neroni 8 21 8 2 12 EXIT aoii arn ana E NaS AEE NENEA 8 22 8 3 The Edit Menu asics eceecpeactyudezeereserasheceeactanchatesoczeesscubdeers 8 23 S31 Und pete theese tl anaiari ETa aa A Eara 8 23 8 32 Redo soriioroiarar n rata Aaa EEE 8 23 84 The Bin MenU cainniche a 8 24 8 4 1 Import Bif is siisii naine aii 8 24 8 4 2 Export BiNicenopierme apa niie e ENE EE N ea 8 25 943 Clear Bin eexcsphctecn sted ee a ra r 8 25 844 RIECK BiM srerreirissiirirriniepisenii sidus etiani a i iai 8 25 BAS Generate POKES cciccece ss cancasczes sectincce eee icdeeteenniee sa 8 26 BAG Delete PIONS ctceccsiedetasonenedeeacins eesetseeticsiaeencoecuant 8 27 8 4 7 Activate al
229. io file generation you will get one file that contains audio for channel 1 and 2 and you will get another file where you can hear nothing for channel 3 and 4 Audio track of Edit Tool 1 2 Contents audio file 1 Output settings of tracks channel 1 2 channel 3 4 Output settings in Finaliz channel 1 2 ing window channel 3 4 Results in file containing aa 4 audio nothing mute ile 1 The Menus Next follows another example to demonstrate how to use the finalizing of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool for mixing and blending operations of audio files Example 2 The audio track 1 and 2 of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool contain each an au dio clip with different contents audio file 1 and 2 Both tracks are configured to an output of channel 1 and 2 In the Finalizing win dow you select the channels 1 and 2 for an audio file generation This will result in one audio file that contains the mixed contents of the au dio files 1 and 2 Audio track of Edit Tool 1 2 Contents audio file 1 audio file 2 Output settings of tracks channel 1 2 channel 1 2 Output settings in Finaliz channel 1 2 ing window Results in file containing mixed contents of audio file 1 and 2 CLIPSTER will generate the new audio files according to your stated storage information see section Storage Information on page 8 12 and your selected audio output
230. ip stereo clip PVs The Timeline Once the settings for the respective track are set confirm and activate them with the button OK of the Track properties window With CLIPSTER it is not necessary to configure the output of i audio further because it will be given out via AES EBU and em bedded in the video signal simultaneously However via the SETTINGS button in the timeline area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can configure the analog audio outputs to monitor audio during your editing work see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 17 as well as the maximum amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations Via the SETTINGS button you can configure the an alog audio outputs to monitor audio during your work with the software It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items for a further configuration of audio The other items available in the Options area are explained in their respective sections see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Loading and Apply ing a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 and section Croppi
231. ip has to be prerendered prior to a play page 6 42 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 8 The Operator Flip Flop The flip flop operator enables you to mirror the video image vertically and or horizontally Flip mirror at vertical axis Flop mirror at horizontal axis XM Delnterlace Figure 7 14 Flip flop operator The following settings are available on the flip flop operator Setting Meaning Flip When this check box is enabled the clip s im ages will be flipped in the horizontal direc tion i e the image is mirrored along the vertical axis Flop Activating the Flop check box will mirror the images along the horizontal axis thereby turning the pictures upside down If the flip flop operator is used on a clip it has to be preren iJ dered prior to a play out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 7 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 9 The Operator 1st Color Correction The operator 1st Color Correction can be used to perform a primary color and or gamma correction on the currently selected clip in the timeline It provides a user interface where you can load a static LUT as well as several sliders for a more immediate control Static LUT X Zo Pan X Flip Flop X 1st Color C Gamma Gain GB GS RGB RGB X 2nd Color C 00 00 00 00 i 1 000 00 00 R 1 000 1 000 B 1 000 Figure 7 15 1st color correctio
232. ired position for the respective clip For a frame accurate trimming you may also use the controls i below the two overlays see section The Trim Controls on page 5 26 You cannot change the in outpoint beyond the limits of the original material on the video hard disks Your alterations will be effective immediately in the timeline After changing the settings of the handlers you can for example define a transition between the clips or perform a play out More information about the trim mode and how to adjust an i in and outpoint in this mode can be found in section The Trim Mode on page 5 25 The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 How to Change In Outpoints in the Timeline You can change in and outpoints of clips already added to the timeline in their timeline tracks For this perform the following e Select from the clip s representation its in or outpoint handler and move it to the right or to the left to extend or reduce the clip s length in the timeline You cannot change in and outpoints beyond the limits of the original material on the video hard disks Staples_Uf handler Figure 6 41 Changing of in or outpoint 6 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 46 This will change the in or outpoint of the clip according
233. it Tool User Guide PVs 7 34 1 2 3 Figure 7 28 Altering the selection shapes You can select a shape completely and drag it to the position within the bar that you want to cover 1 the area of the selection shape is moved but the colored back G Because the hue bar represents a color wheel in this case not ground amp You can select the top and bottom sides of the shapes and move them 2 thereby reducing or enlarging the area covered by the selec tion shapes Finally you can select one of the four corner points and po sition them to your liking 3 r The softness settings of each shape may lie outside the vector i area settings but not within i e the left or right corner points can only be dragged to be level with its opposing point on the other side of the shape but not further S As already mentioned the settings of the selection shapes corner points can be seen in the entry fields to the right The top entry fields display the settings of the six corner points for the color vector i e they show the settings of the left two corner points of each shape The bot tom six entry fields show the settings of the right corner points and in dicate the softness of the vector You can also adjust the color vector softness in the entry fields directly by simply entering a value and afterwards pressing Enter on your keyboard The value ranges that can be entered are as follows Setting Ran
234. iting button L With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Here you can also configure the size of the video and or audio tracks There is also a setting available that per forms an autoscaling of the material in the timeline if the reso lution differs from the configured output raster As a next step we want to delete one of the clips of the timeline and change the sequence of the remaining clips 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline Because for this tutorial we want to have only two clips in the video track clip B and clip A in this particular order we have to delete the second part of clip A and then change the sequence of the remaining two clips For this perform the steps as described below e Select the second part of clip A the last clip present in the timeline with a click of the mouse and delete it with the keyboard key Del The representation of the clip in the timeline will be deleted and you will see two remaining clips in the video track of the timeline Getting Started Figure 3 7 Clip A and clip B in timeline Now we want to change the sequence of the remaining two clips e Select clip B second clip in the timeline with the mouse and drag it along the timeline to the beginning of the timeline p iStaples_Uf Figure 3 8 Changing the position of the clip When the dragged clip reaches certain ele
235. l alter its appear ance and during the creation of the markers it will show ABORT Then you can abort the creation of the timeline markers e g if there are too many of them with a click of the mouse 4 44 The Tool Area Once the placing of the markers is finished this button shows the labeling UNMARK ALL Then you can remove with it all timeline markers from the timeline in one step f The MARK ALL button will not be available i in the CLIPSTER I O Tool because this module provides no timeline where mark ers can be set AEFT The CLEAR button deletes all entries displayed in the drop table Afterwards you may start a new real time operation which in turn may report new drops in the table This button will be available as soon as drops are displayed in the drop table and the real time operation is finished 4 5 6 Using the Performance Monitor The performance monitor of CLIPSTER monitors the hard disk accesses of the CLIPSTER software to the video data With it you can verify for example the status of the hard disks of the storage array as well as of certain files on the array rz Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im i age files that are not present on the hard disk array at all will not cause the performance monitor to show a drop However you can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check
236. l proxies scteivasvsicredvetarcdtmienetvecacteaesteciianntih 8 27 8 4 8 Deactivate all proxies eesssessssssssrrrrirrrrrrrreseseessnnn 8 28 8 5 The Options Menu eseseeerereeiieriirisrrreeieriserieerierseress 8 29 8 5 1 Driver CONMGCL seriosi iteeed at heleietet ieee eee 8 29 8 5 2 Project config occas tscera ch cbecdniess osssesdhcassiteatacageece 8 29 8 5 3 Defaults teat tte te cea lesa eence ect eeedeeceaks Sectelactiedtendcend 8 30 8 5 4 ed defaults ierre anota EE aa 8 31 85 9 S ved faults a arrien iE E aa T 8 31 8 6 The Help Menu ssseceeeeiserierieeirerisrisrrierieriseriserrrrserens 8 33 8 61 POs sririterissiirct kit iisip a Aiara iias 8 33 8 62 L100 gee te ee a E NE 8 33 Appendix si scnctint actors eethdsboe etcetera tee en ete A 1 A 1 Glossary of USB aaseatecia cess eae nce tec eciacts tetouadte ne decneceneeente A 1 A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts oss ec ec easter eee ead A 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs vi A 3 Supported File Formats eee A 7 A 4 1D LUT File Syntax ces c acceses eases iets ase ceekene caer anes A 10 A 5 Slave 1113 0 lt 2 9 0 a 3 OPenere eeserens reer mene ire er erret eer Veetue rene ren eter A 11 A 6 System Maintenance scterscicritiriersieniverealateiarenmercersonaians A 12 A 6 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process A 12 A 6 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually s e A 14 dekone a entree l 1 Introduction This documentation describes how to use t
237. lay and the outputs of the CLIP STER video system CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Source Image P lt i l ue a Figure 7 23 Color corrected example image Once the color alterations are set as desired the procedure to perform a secondary color correction is finished The changes are immediately applied to the selected clip in the timeline However prior to a real time play out the clip where the secondary color correction is applied has to be prerendered see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Further information about the items to perform a color correction can be found in section The Color Correction and Balance Area on page 7 37 7 10 2 Color Vector List 7 30 From the color vector list to the left of the settings pane of the second ary color correction you have to choose a vector for the color correc tion Once the procedure to perform a secondary color correction is completed it will hold your data of the selected color or color range as well as the changes applied to color correct it The CLIPSTER software provides overall seven predefined color vectors One that has all colors selected and six others that provide each a dif ferent color Timeline Element Properties Color Vector ColorO01 Color 02 Color 06 Color 07 Figure 7 24 Color vector list of the secondary color correction Simply select one of
238. le extension Example V tempest edl1 tempest_edl The Menus Setting up the Timeline for the EDL Use the area Export to set up the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool i e the tracks as well as the timeline s range for the creation of the EDL It provides the settings items as described below Audio This check box determines that audio should be part of the EDL i e the contents of the audio tracks of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be added to the created file Video This check box determines that video should be part of the EDL i e the contents of the video track s of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be added to the created file Replace gaps If this check box is enabled gaps present in the with black clips timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be handled as black clips in the EDL Range With this combo box you have to set whether the EDL should include the complete timeline A11 or the part between a set in and outpoint of the timeline only In Out If In Out is selected but no in and outpoint defined in the timeline the whole timeline will be used for the creation By muting audio and or video tracks you can determine the i contents of the timeline that should be used during the cre ation of the EDL further see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 Configuration of the EDL Timecode Because an EDL for the most part contains detailed timecode informa tion the area Timecode of the
239. lements on the timeline the added clip will automati cally align itself to these elements in our example here to the beginning 3 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 8 of the timeline This behavior is called the snapping mode of the CLIP STER Edit Tool The snapping mode is a very useful feature if you want to po i sition clips in the timeline It reacts not only to the starting point of the timeline but also to the in and outpoint of clips the po sition of the timeline cursor or the set in and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is usually defined by the length of the clip However all these attributes can be changed easily after clips were added to the timeline their position within the timeline as well as their in and outpoints of the timeline without contents may appear in the timeline A gap is indicated by a red line right above the timeline scale If this occurs you can move the clip easily to the beginning of the timeline as indicated in section Moving Clips in the Timeline on page 3 10 i If the clip is released somewhere in the video track a gap part e Now add the second clip of the bin to the timeline clip B If
240. line You can play out the whole timeline you can review a part of the timeline and you can play out a part of the timeline 6 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS The first two are also initiated via their respective controls of the CLIP STER Edit Tool the play and REVIEW button However to play out a defined part of the timeline only you have to set an in and outpoint for the timeline How to do this is described in section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 Once they are set you can initiate a play out of the defined range with the play button of the controls see section Controls on page 5 11 In addition to the controls of the user interface there are a lot of key board shortcuts available These complement the controls some of them do not even have a control element in the user interface and you can use them for a faster working with the software A listing of all key board shortcuts can be found in section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 5 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline 6 28 With the buttons DELETE and the in and outpoint items of the time line area you can set an in and outpoint for the timeline A play out and finalizing if set accordingly will then be performed in the defined range between in and outpoint only The way the timeline is played out can be configured with the i Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTE
241. line The entries in the table can be sorted in descending or ascending order For this simply click on the respective column heading with the mouse that you want to sort the list by This switches between an ascending and descending order of the entries in the respective column The type of order will be indicated by a triangle to the right of the column head ing PVs The Tool Area 4 5 The Performance Monitor With the performance monitor of CLIPSTER you can monitor the work load of the CLIPSTER video system during a real time operation Thus you can verify for example the status of the hard disks of the storage array as well as of certain files on the array After starting the CLIPSTER software and thus the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area As soon as you select the tab Perform in the tool area the area will look similar to the following figure Bin Effects Markers Perform chart chart controls status bar Timeline TC Frame File drop table table controls jve Mark All Figure 4 21 The performance monitor The performance monitor provides you with detailed information about occurring dropped frames frames that CLIPSTER could not load or write in time during the performed real time operation Via the table below you can also get information about the location where the drop took place CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 38 For this the performance moni
242. line on page 6 35 During the positioning of the in or outpoint handler of clips you can see a representation of the length of the clip in its timeline track of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The blue line right above the clip shows its original length PVs The Timeline i head tail indicator Figure 6 43 Display of original length of clip With this you can easily determine whether and how much head or tail is available to for example create a transition 6 4 12 Advanced Trimming The advanced trimming features of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool work the same way as the changing of in and outpoints of clips already added to the timeline see section How to Change In Outpoints in the Timeline on page 6 45 They are available when you select two or more in or outpoint handlers of timeline elements present in the time line This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions 06 02 outpoint handler inpoint handler Figure 6 44 In and outpoint handlers selected To select more than one handler perform the following e Select one of the desired handlers with a click of the mouse e Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on another desired handler with the mouse Perform this step for as many additional handlers as you want 6 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 48 After that you can click on one of the handlers and
243. line but when playing out or finalizing you can switch back to the original material in high resolution This section describes how to administrate proxies in the CLIPSTER software Creating a Proxy For more information about proxies in general see section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 For each clip available in the bin that may exceed the real time capabil ity of CLIPSTER you can create a proxy to ensure a real time capable environment This means when the resolution of the clip is greater than 2K you can create proxies via its context menu in the bin If the clip s resolution does not exceed the real time capability i of CLIPSTER the respective menu options to administrate proxies will not be available CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 26 e In the bin call up the context menu on the clip that you want to have a proxy of and select the menu option Create proxy Alternatively you can use the menu option Generate prox i ies on the Bin menu to create proxies It is especially useful when there are more than one clip in the bin that you want to create a proxy of With this menu option they can be cre ated in a single step see section Generate proxies on page 8 26 This will open the Render jobs window detailing the current status of the render operation In case several render operations were trig gered they will be dealt with successively and for each a new R
244. ll as to your video output as soon as a value is con firmed by pressing the Enter key You may also use the sliders at the bottom and to the left to change the cropping Furthermore you can select the cropping borders as well as the cropped image to adjust the cropping manually The sliders as well as the entry fields and if applicable the aspect ratio to the left will be altered accordingly lt _P Figure 6 25 Adjusting the cropping manually with the mouse Once everything is set as desired confirm your selection with the OK button at the bottom of the Timeline cropping window The button CANCEL right beside it will close the window for the cropping settings without confirming any of the alterations However the cropping will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Cropping in the Options area of the Output settings window is activated Video Cropping Cropping Figure 6 26 Activation of the 3D LUT profile 6 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Then the configured cropping will be applied to the whole timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The color value of the black bars added to the timeline via i cropping and played out via the CLIPSTER hardware depends on the setting for the color space range specified in the video output settings Via the color space range settings you deter mine whether this value is given out in a restricted e g with a value of 16 setting Head or in a
245. ll start its monitoring of the performance as well 4 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 48 Bin Effects Markers Perform Update i 7 DVSInfo Reset Clipster is operating Date Time ype Timeline TC Frame i iT Mark All Clear Figure 4 28 Healthy performance Because CLIPSTER is capable of handling even high resolution material in real time you usually will not encounter any problem The perfor mance bars will always appear in blue and no drops should occur CLIP STER is able to process several different image files simultaneously multi threaded I O mode and one bar shown in the chart may repre sent several file accesses Thus the bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not pose a problem to the real time op eration It simply shows that all threads of the software are currently processing and no thread is idle If drops occur they will be entered in the drop table of the performance monitor and red bars will appear in the chart Then please proceed as follows e Check the position of the drops on the video timeline by double clicking entries individually or by selecting the MARK ALL button of the table controls e Afterwards perform the play out operation and the checking of the drop positions again e Then compare the results and confront them with the following table Dvs The Tool Area video clips a resolution that is too high or O
246. lly adjust its position on the timeline respectively While trimming the outpoint you will notice a blue line above the se lected clip head tail indicator t e Figure 3 10 Display of original length of clip This line shows the original length of the clip You can use it to deter mine easily how much tail is available to for example create a transi tion e Once sufficient tail is available release the outpoint handler and drop it Getting Started With this you have manipulated the outpoint of the clip The same way you can of course change inpoints as well You cannot change the in and outpoint of a clip beyond the limits of its original material on the video hard disks indicated by the head tail indicator As a last step in our example project we now want to add a transition to the cut between clip B and clip A on the timeline 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline timeline cursor Once at least two clips are present in the video track of the timeline you can add a transition between the clips In our example we want to apply a transition to the cutting point between clip B and clip A For this perform the following e Via the controls E RG or the keyboard shortcuts S jump forwards and A jump backwards you can move the timeline cur sor to cutting points on the timeline Use the respective button or key to go to the cutting point between the clips Figure 3 11 Tim
247. ly This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video i clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions To adjust their length in the timeline simply select their in out point handler and move it to the right or left of the timeline The following figure shows for example how to change the length of a transition 06 008 Staples_Ufd Holhawoo d Figure 6 42 Changing the length of a transition However the length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 As long as the insert mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is active i the subsequent clips and embedded operators will automati i cally adjust their positions on the timeline respectively When the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is set to the overwrite mode clips and embedded operators may get deleted from the timeline or gaps may occur in the timeline More information on this can be found in section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Time line on page 6 32 The in or outpoint handler will react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool to allow for an automated positioning You can deactivate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Further information about the snapping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Time
248. ma Chroma With the Master Luma and Chroma items you can adjust the lumi nance as well as color settings CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 7 24 Master Luma Chroma Master Contrast Gamma Brightness Luma High Low Chroma Hue Saturation 00 00 1 000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 7 17 The area for master luma and chroma With the Master items you can adjust luminance relevant settings such as gamma or brightness Contrast Gamma Brightness With the contrast items you can set the contrast of the clip s images An increase of the contrast setting will push the image colors more towards their full col or whereas a decrease will adjust the colors more to wards a tone of grey You can adjust the settings between 100 no contrast and 100 maximum contrast Gamma adjusts the mid tones of an image Lowering the value will darken the mid tones bringing the im age closer to black Raising the value will lighten the mid tones while bringing the image closer to white Sometimes this setting can be used to make details visible that are usually hidden in shadows or high lights The settings range is between 0 1 and 3 where 1 represents the unchanged image The brightness setting adjusts the luminance of the image and indicates the bright and darkness of the image colors It is measured between 100 black and 100 white The items of the group Luma allow you to adjust
249. main on your video hard disk and have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Manually on page A 14 8 2 11 Clean temp dir Clean temp dir When you continue your work on a timeline that was already preren dered e g with the Prerender all menu option see section Prerender all on page 8 20 and you delete or change some of the already pre rendered timeline elements the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will no longer need the already generated files A change of the video format will also make already preren i dered files of timeline elements obsolete A prerendering may be necessary before a play out when CLIPSTER is not able to handle the contents of the timeline e g a special operator in real time This will be indicated in the timeline by a yellow line above the respective element that cannot be played out see section Preren dering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 With a prerendering CLIP STER automatically calculates the respective parts and generates temporary images that are then played out instead of the original ma CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS terial of the timeline Those files are stored in a temporary directory and administered automatically by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool However if you continue your work on such a timeline and delete or alter elements that needed prerendering the already prerendered files are not deleted or altered automatically during the proce
250. matic defragmentation of the video storage for an opti mized real time performance Furthermore there are several features optionally available for the CLIPSTER Edit Tool which allow you to adapt the CLIPSTER software to your special needs The following options are available CLIPSTER 3D LUT and ColorManagement Op tion CLIPSTER 12Bit Option CLIPSTER 4K Workflow Option CLIPSTER Color Correc tion Panel CLIPSTER MultiDevice CLIPSTER Raster Option CLIPSTER Remote Zoom amp Pan Option CLIPSTER Secondary ColorCorrection Option Three dimensional hardware look up ta ble for real time color management and film look preview output Support of 12 and 16 bit file formats DPX and TIFF for in and output Non real time workflow with 4K material including effects editing cropping as well as conforming color correction and cap turing Real time play out of 4K material up to 4096 x 2160 RGB 10 bit at 24 Hz Tactile colorist control panel for CLIP STER s primary color correction Enables a synchronous play out of multi ple CLIPSTERs One CLIPSTER master de vice controls other CLIPSTER slave devices via RS 422 for a synchronous play out of the timeline Customized video rasters for in and out put Remote control of real time zoom and pan operation from a third party color grader Secondary color correction for the CLIP STER Edit Tool PVs Introduction Additional Operators Additional editing an
251. me to export the bin Once you confirm your settings with the button SAVE the contents of your bin containing all folders and clips will be saved to an extra file File extension cb CLIPSTER bin file After that you can import the contents of this file again into another project see section Import Bin on page 8 24 8 4 3 Clear Bin The Clear Bin menu option on the menu Bin deletes all folders and clips from the bin of your current project The selection of this menu option calls up a warning message After the confirmation that you really want to delete the contents of the bin the bin will be cleared If your currently active bin was altered and not saved you will i be asked by the program whether you want to save its con tents to a bin file When you answer this query with YEs the same procedure as to export a bin will be initiated see section Export Bin on page 8 25 8 4 4 Check Bin Check Bin Crit Shite ke During the loading of a project file and the import of a bin the CLIP STER Edit Tool performs a limited test regarding the availability of the clips present in the bin It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the video hard disks Via the Check Bin menu option you can check your bin and thus your timeline more thoroughly for errors and inconsistencies After the selection of the menu option Check Bin the CLIPSTER Edit Tool verifies that each
252. meline area to the left of the sliders to change the timeline s view This button displays or hides the volume control lines of the audio clips 6 66 Attach Disconnect ele ment Disconnect group Disconnect timeline Enable tooltip Select all Cut Copy Paste These menu options enable you to work with at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach an audio to a video clip Further information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in section Attaching an Audio Clip to a Video Clip on page 6 50 Clips added to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool provide various information via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tooltips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is acti vated the menu option will show a cross in front Additional information about the tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 11 With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 36 Using these menu options all timeline elements can be cut or copied
253. mented files and align them on the hard disks so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a record In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragmented files and so on until all data is defragmented sufficiently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragmentation is detected once more gt When operating at regular intervals with sufficient stand still i times and a moderate acquisition of data the hard disk array Of CLIPSTER video system will always be in a perfect state for real time operations The CLIPSTER defragmentation process uses proprietary rou A tines to defragment the data on the hard disks Because the Windows defragmentation tool does not apply the same rou tines itis best not to use it for a defragmentation of the video hard disk array but to leave this task to the CLIPSTER defrag mentation process alone A triggered defragmentation process is automatically halted as soon as a real time task is performed or CLIPSTER is set to one of the other above mentioned states and it will be started again when CLIPSTER provides the operating conditions of the defragmentation process once more After copying or recording vast amounts of data to the video A hard disk array it is recommended to run the CLIPSTER soft ware for a longer period of time e g over night without per forming any real time tasks play out or record or having the slave mode V
254. ments on the timeline it will automatically aligns itself to these elements snapping mode of CLIP STER Edit Tool see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 3 6 e Once the dragged clip reaches the beginning of the timeline release and drop it With the CLIPSTER Edit Tool in the insert mode the rest of the video material in the timeline will move backwards in the timeline as soon as the clip is dropped After changing the sequence of the clips this tutorial goes on with a de scription how to change in and outpoints of clips in the timeline 3 11 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline 3 12 Clip A now the second clip in the timeline was cut during the adding of clip B to the timeline Thus it already provides a trimmed outpoint However clip B now the first clip in the timeline was added with its full length If a transition should be set between these two clips at least one of their in and outpoint has to be trimmed either the outpoint of clip B or the inpoint of clip A To demonstrate how to add a transition between the two clips we now want to change the outpoint of clip B in the timeline e Select the end of clip B first clip in timeline and move it to the left to trim its outpoint tail Mak Delete m Staples_Ut Figure 3 9 Changing of outpoint As long as the insert mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is active clip A will automatica
255. n Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 When adding or moving clips in the timeline you have to heed i the current insert overwrite mode of the timeline More infor mation on this can be found in section The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 32 0 0 0 9 4 4 0 0 PVs The Timeline 6 1 1 Taking a Clip Directly from the Bin You can take a clip directly from the contents area of the bin and add it to the tracks of the timeline For this perform the following e Select one clip or more with the Ctrl key pressed in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it with the mouse into a video or audio track Video clips can only be dragged to the video track s of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and audio clips only to the audio tracks Figure 6 2 Drag and drop of video clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip is added to the timeline When using clips from the bin they are neither removed nor i deleted there They will remain in the bin for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of the clip to the timeline again The clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released When adding a video clip and releasing it somewhere in the i video track a gap may appear in the timeline It can be closed automatically with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale below the
256. n and outpoint handlers can be selected and moved with the mouse to set the in or outpoint of the clips 12 00 The counters below the timelines of the clips dis play the length of the clips in timecode format or the amount of frames that the clips provide cal culated from the set in and outpoint handlers These are the other in and outpoints of the clips They cannot be selected and moved To adjust them you have to jump to their respective cutting points The OuT and IN buttons are toggle buttons In their active state MEMMEN a the respective in or outpoint is selected for a trim ming The OuT button selects the outpoint of the clip to the left side of the cutting point The IN but ton selects the inpoint of the clip to its right Then the respective in or outpoint can be changed with the controls below the two fields that display the changes applied to the trimming points The OuT and IN buttons will change their i state automatically when one of the trimming items above is selected directly for a trimming i e when you select ei ther the blue bar or one of the in or out point handlers With the two fields below the OuT and IN button you can monitor the changing of the out or in point and thus adjust them frame accurately The left field shows the changes to the outpoint of the clip to the left of the cut while the right field dis plays the changes to the inpoint of the clip to t
257. n dark grey in dicate parts of timeline that are currently not visible in the timeline area at the moment You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 in light grey Parts in light grey show the part of the timeline that is currently visible in the timeline area You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline Furthermore by moving within the timeline you can change its position see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 This part can be selected directly with i the mouse and moved along the scrub bar to switch the view of the video and audio tracks in the timeline area to an other part of the timeline 5 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Items of Scrub Bar Description The blue line indicates the part of the timeline selected via the timeline s in and outpoint For information on how to set the in and outpoint of the timeline see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 With the scrub bar cursor you can move within your project Simply select the cursor with the mouse and move it along the scrub bar to the desired position You can also click on a posi tion outside the visible timeline area on the scrub bar directly to move the cursor and the visible part of the timeline there immediately Additio
258. n file will now be added to the contents of the effects pane In case your effects pane already contains preset effects they are not deleted but will remain there while the con tents of the new preset effects will be added Only when the names of preset effects are identical case sensitive will they be overwritten Sorting Default and Preset Effects The default effects available as well as preset effects can be sorted You can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains alot of preset effects this may make it easier for you to find an individ ual effect To sort the effects do the following e Simply click on the title bar Available Operators above the effects pane with the mouse This switches between a descending and ascending order of the effects folders as well as of all effects visible in the effects pane PVs The Tool Area 4 4 The Marker Table In the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you have the possibility to place markers at certain positions e g as a reminder to cut the clip at this position at a later stage or other reasons These timeline markers can be placed either manually in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool or via the performance monitor of the CLIPSTER software With the lat ter the markers will indicate the position where drops occurred during a real time operation Additional information about timeline markers and their man ual placing can be found in section Marki
259. n of the compo nents Y U and V separately The Y graph is shown on the left side while the color difference signals U and V are displayed in the middle and to the right As with the RGB parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the distribution is shown Figure 5 9 The YUV parade However because U and V can take on negative as well as positive val ues their graphs usually are distributed around a center line It can be found in the middle of the YUV parade because in digital video an off set of 128 was added to U and V to get rid of the negative value In case the output image is black and white only U and V would be zero 128 resulting in a flat line in the middle of their graphs The more the color values of an output image increase the more the two graphs would be dispersed Values of U greater than 50 in the graph indicate positive values and blue hues while values of less than 50 indicate yel low hues and negative values The same applies to V with the exception that values greater 50 would indicate red hues and values less than 50 cyan hues Regarding the luma signal Y a value of zero indicates black while a value of 100 represents white Nevertheless especially when working with YUV a reserved headroom for all components should be observed Waveform The waveform video scope is similar to the RGB parade It displays graphically the distribution of the color components red green and blue RGB
260. n operator The operator for the primary color correction provides for most settings a slider as well as an entry field This section describes in detail the set tings provided by the 1st Color Correction operator 7 9 1 Static LUT With the operator 1st Color Correction you can assign a static look up table LUT to the currently selected clip to perform a color and or gamma correction With this operator only one dimensional look up tables i 1D LUT can be applied 3D LUTs can be loaded and applied to the timeline via the video format settings optional feature see section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 Static LUT Figure 7 16 The area for a static LUT 7 22 Timeline Element Properties In the area Static LUT you can find at its top a list box that will contain the LUT files in the order they were selected If the list box contains more than one LUT the effects of all LUT files are combined to color correct the images of the clip Below the list box three buttons are available With the button you can load a LUT For this select in the opening dialog window the direc tory path and file name of the look up table After this confirm your se lection with the button OPEN This will load the selected LUT file and its name and path will be entered in the list box above File extension lut Look up table The selected file will then be valid for the currently selected clip and a
261. nally with a mouse click directly below or above the part of the scrub bar in light grey you can position the scrub bar cursor there in stantly PVs The Control Area 5 3 Controls At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located In addition to other important buttons you can also find buttons to switch between the different video overlay modes of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool here the edit mode the source edit mode and the trim mode With this button you can switch to the edit mode The edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is the standard operating mode of this software module By default this mode is activated after the starting of the program In the edit mode usually only one video overlay is visible where you can see and check your changes applied to the clips in the timeline This button activates the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool where you can select the in and outpoint of a clip coming from the bin before adding it to the timeline Once everything is set you can drag the clip from the control area to a vid eo track of the timeline The source edit mode is described in more detail in section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 E You can switch to the trim mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool with this button After its activation the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point and the timeline cursor will be positioned
262. nce by adding clips to the bin Inthe CLIPSTER Edit Tool only one project file can be processed i at a time If you open an already saved project or activate the menu option New again the currently active project file will be closed However if you have already performed changes to the project you will be asked by the program if you want to save the current project When you start a new project file the autosave function is disabled because of a missing file name for the project The autosave function automatically saves your project file after a certain period of time for backup purposes see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more details To enable the autosave function you have to save the project file first and thus assign a name to it 8 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs available uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the CLIPSTER software Further information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide i The VTR task mode of the CLIPSTER I O Tool that is optionally 8 2 2 Open 8 4 The Open menu option opens the standard dialog window of the operating system for the selection of a file In this dialog window select the project file that you want to open in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool File extensions cp CLIPSTER project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project
263. ndicator Loudness in 12 dB 25 6 dB 50 0 0 dB 100 6 dB 200 12 dB 400 While a totally decreased control point means that audio is i muted a fully increased one does not necessarily mean that audio is set to 200 You can move a control point beyond the limits of the audio clip which will increase the volume over 200 This will be indicated then by a shifted 100 level line it is then located in the lower half of the audio clip 6 6 4 Waveform Display 6 68 With the button Wave you can switch on or off the waveform display of the audio clips in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool You can find it at the bottom of the timeline area to the left of the sliders that change the timeline s view directly to the right of the button VOLUME A waveform is a graphical representation of an audio signal and the WAVE button displays or hides the wave forms of the audio clips The Timeline Volume a Figure 6 61 Audio waveforms For each channel available in the respective audio clip one waveform will be displayed i e a mono clip provides one waveform only whereas a stereo clip shows two waveforms one for each channel The appearance of the waveforms can be configured to your liking with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 6 69 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 6 70 Timeline Element Properties Timeline element properties are
264. ne element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 6 4 7 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range You can delete all timeline elements in a specified range of the timeline easily To determine the range and part of the timeline where the dele tion should occur you have to use the timeline s in and outpoint Af terwards all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timeline can be deleted e Move the timeline cursor to the position on the timeline where the range should begin see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 e Click the inpoint button of the timeline area i This will set the inpoint of the timeline to the current position of the timeline cursor e Now move the timeline cursor to the position of the timeline where the range should end e Click the outpoint button of the timeline area R After this you have set the in and outpoint of the timeline to determine the timeline part where all elements should be deleted from For more information about the setting of the in and outpoint of the timeline see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 28 Now you are able to delete the timeline elements e Call up the context menu of the timeline scale usually invoked with a right click of the mouse and select the menu option Del
265. ne of the applied clip effects is not real time capable Marker Timeline f oa Probable Cause Solution Position Element At certain On video clip s Material at certain Check the material on the video hard position s or transitions frames faulty disk array and replace the faulty files After this the problem should be re solved Atrandom Within certain Either the material has Either prerender the timeline elements if they are a subject to a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 or finalize the timeline see section Finalize on page 8 11 After this the problem should be resolved The clip is stored on an unlicensed disk Either move the clip to a location of li censed disks or provide a license for the storage location where the clip is located see section Unlicensed Hard Disks on page 4 17 On transition s Timeline material has a resolution that is too high for two simulta neous video streams If the respective transitions are dis played in the timeline without a prer endering indication reduce the value that indicates when a timeline element has to be prerendered see CLIPSTER Configuration Tool in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Then prerender the transitions see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 After this the problem should be resolved Throughout the timeline The configuration of the vi
266. never the EDL to be cre ated should provide these features Overwrite tape names of bin clips Name Effects EDL Format Usually when generating an EDL the names of the clips as they can be seen in the timeline will be used as the tape name see for instance section The Clip s Information on page 6 53 By selecting this check box you can enter a different tape name in the entry field Name Once the check box to overwrite the tape names is enabled this entry field will be available With it you can specify a different tape name for the clips in the EDL It will be used for all clips present in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool ii You have to enter the tape name in the correct notation of the EDL format that is selected with the combo box EDL For mat see below With this combo box you determine whether tran sitions available in the timeline should be retained in the EDL or replaced by hard cuts instead Select from this combo box the EDL format that the created EDL should provide PVs The Menus Creating the EDL Once the settings to export an EDL are complete you can start the gen eration of the EDL with the buttons below the area Options In detail they provide you with the following possibilities EXPORT Use this button to start the generation of the EDL After the EDL is successfully created the window to set up the EDL creation will be closed and you will return to the ma
267. ng Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 A description about the setting of timeline markers with the performance monitor can be found in section The Drop Table on page 4 43 Once markers are positioned in the timeline the tab Markers of the tool area provides further information about them After its selection and when markers are available in the timeline the area will look similar to the following Figure 4 20 List of timeline markers in the tool area The tab Markers provides in a table a list of all timeline markers that are currently available in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The in dividual entries give information about their absolute and relative posi tions in the timeline In detail the different columns show you the following Column Description Position Details the absolute position of the timeline marker in the timeline in frames i e its position without a timecode frames offset set for the timeline CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DvS 4 36 Column Description Timecode Shows you the relative position of the marker in timecode notation i e its absolute position column Position plus the timecode frames offset set for the timeline Frame As column Timecode but in frame notation When you select an entry from the list with a double click of the mouse the timeline cursor will jump to the respective timeline marker on the time
268. ng the Timeline on page 6 20 Video Cropping Cropping 3D LUT 3 a ETN TTI audio Audio Scrubbing onitoring Om configuration Figure 6 16 Items for a further configuration of audio In detail this area provides the following items Audio If this check box is activated during a scrubbing of Scrubbing the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline for example with a fast shuttle operation with the mouse the contents of the audio tracks will still be given out Then the audio signal resembles and imitates a fast shuttle operation of a VTR For this the analog au dio signal has to be configured appropriately via the button MONITORING CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs MONITORING The button MONITORING configures the analog audio outputs of CLIPSTER A click on this button opens the following window Audio monitoring Analog audio Output A Channel 1 2 Output B Channel 3 4 Cancel Figure 6 17 Analog audio configuration The settings Output A and Output B configure the first and second analog monitoring output of the CLIPSTER hardware respectively Select from the combo boxes the audio channels that should be given out at the respective analog output nels than channel 1 and 2 on the analog audio outputs the audio outputs of the audio tracks of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool have to be configured appropriately Fur ther information about this can be found in section How to Configure the Audio Ou
269. nger available For prerendering this means that all parts of the timeline that had to be prerendered are marked with a yellow line again see section Preren dering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Then you may start anew prerendering process for example with the menu option Prerender all see section Prerender all on page 8 20 For proxies this means that you will receive the original material auto matically again Afterwards you may start a new proxy generation pro cess for example with the menu option Generate proxies see section Generate proxies on page 8 26 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Once the creation of the new temporary data is finished you can be sure that all files in the directories for the temporary data are valid ones After the creation of temporary data save your project file If AN an already saved project file is not saved after such a process again the temporary files will not be recognized by the CLIP STER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Nei ther will they be used for a play out nor can they be deleted via software In such a case they have to be deleted manually once more Index Numerics NID LOW girri 7 22 SD LUT aard seen rsetecsenss 6 18 enable sririsirriiieiionnyiieas 6 20 file irissat na a 6 20 file management eeee 6 19 Profile isuga eiea 6 19 N T 2 11 4 25 A about the software esec 8 33 accessing properties cccesenss
270. o cessing tasks such as color correction or image processing Depending on the configuration of the CLIPSTER video system and the optional features installed there may be numerous operators available that en hance the editing functionality of CLIPSTER Other plug in operators can be programmed by anyone who knows how to develop software via C and wants to have special editing operators for their work via the freely available CLIPSTER Software Development Kit Further infor mation about the operators and plug ins can be found in section Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 2 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 2 2 Overview of the User Interface The following figure shows the user interface of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as it appears after starting the program for information on how to start the program see chapter Getting Started on page 3 1 menu bar tool area control area Eni Est Bin Options HI Bin Effects Markers Perfor Folders eooo y task bar timeline area Figure 2 2 User interface of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The CLIPSTER software is designed to run in full screen mode i with any screen resolution to provide for an undistracted view x on the video material and the editing task at hand To switch to the operating system environment use the Windows A key on your keyboard or select from the menu of the CLIPSTER icon on the menu bar the menu option Minimize see section Minimize on
271. o overlay instantly For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may be cropped stretched or compressed or scaled according to your settings for the respective clips and your output settings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay of the control area CLIPSTER uses only representations of the original material on i the video hard disks for the clips in the bin and the timeline All editing tasks are performed virtually and at all times your orig inal material will never be altered This section describes how to work with the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool in general CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 4 1 The Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline 6 32 The INSERT button toggles between the insert and overwrite mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Insert Mode In the insert mode a moved or added clip is inserted between the video material already present in the timeline The video material behind the insertion point is moved backward in its position on the timeline In the insert mode no video material will be overwritten and intact undivided clips will be divided at the insertion point To set a transition in the insert mode there must be enough i head and tail available otherwise the TRANS button will not be available For more information about transitions see section Setting Transitions on page 6 41 When working with attached clips
272. o tracks with one click master mute lock Afterwards you may use the mute and lock buttons of in dividual tracks to enable them for the respective work again This may be especially useful when working with a lot of tracks When locking tracks and thus preserving them from any editing work the locked tracks will appear dimmed in the timeline area PVs The Timeline 6 4 3 Moving Clips within the Timeline To arrange the clips in the desired sequence on the timeline as they should be played out in the end you have to move the clips within the timeline which is very easy with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Simply select the clip and drag it with the mouse to the desired position on the time line Although the following is shown with video clips the same ap plies to most timeline elements e g audio clips and transitions as well fLandseap b tLandsea p Figure 6 35 Moving a clip With the insert mode activated if a clip is moved to a cutting point the clip will be inserted there while the rest of the material moves back wards in the timeline If it is dropped in the middle of another clip this clip will be divided and its rest as well as the rest of the track s contents will be moved to the end of the inserted clip This behavior depends on the selected mode of the timeline ij With the overwrite mode activated the moved clip will over write the contents of the track from the point of the insertion on See
273. o use a slash Example V tempest act05 scene01 In the entry field File enter the name of the clip to be generated As with the entry field above you may also click on the button to the right of this field IE to select an already existing file Notation Standard file names of the Windows operating sys tem i e do not use the following characters SNr Eee ee Furthermore leave out the file extension Example Clip Regarding the file name and path it is sufficient for the rendering of a new clip to enter an existing path in the field Path and to state a file name All other information necessary such as the numbering of The Menus frames will be added by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool automatically For in stance our examples mentioned above would lead to the following output on the video hard disk array when as a video output format the bmp file format were selected see section The Area Video on page 8 15 V L tempest L act05 scenedl crip Clip_0000 m Clip 00000 bmp IL Clip _00001 bmp m ClIDs L Clip 19999 bmp Clip_0001 Clip_20000 bmp Clip_20001 bmp CLI Des In the path V tempest act05 scene01 a directory will be creat ed carrying the name Clip Beneath it a subdirectory will be created with the name Clip_0000 In this subdirectory the first 20 000 frames of your timeline will be stored Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are J store
274. of an interlaced field will be doubled to get rid of the interlacing The method of doubling lines is most suited when your clip contains no moving objects Line interpolation The effects of the line interpolation method are almost identical to the ones of the line duplica tion Every second line in the image is dropped and replaced by an interpolation of the neighbor ing lines Thus slow moving objects in your clip will most likely be rendered to a good result be cause the difference between two lines is calculat ed and averaged out 7 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 42 Motion adaptive This method will yield good results when your clip contains moving objects because the motion in the clip s images is detected automatically A line interpolation will be applied only when interlacing effects are found This mode provides best quality and does not loose general resolution as only in fast moving parts an interpolation is applied The Parameter area provides two radio buttons that are used to deter mine the starting field for the calculated result Even Odd The even numbered lines starting with line O are used as the starting field for the application of a deinterlacing All odd numbered lines remain un altered The odd numbered lines starting with line 1 are used as the starting field for the application of a deinterlacing All even numbered lines remain un altered With the sliders to the ri
275. of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and at the output of the video system as well As soon as you are finished with your color vector selection you may close the preview window at any time 7 10 4 The Color Correction and Balance Area When the color vector is set and determined you can start to color cor rect it You can either alter the hue of the chosen color s or other prop erties such as brightness or saturation In other words to change a color vector all settings of a primary color correction are at your disposal For CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 38 this you have to use the color wheel and the settings items to the right of the secondary color correction Color Correction Balance Master Contrast 00 00 Gamma 1 000 Brightness 00 00 Gain 00 00 Lift 00 00 Luma High 00 00 Low 00 00 Chroma Hue 00 00 Sat 00 00 Figure 7 31 Color correction and balance controls The applied color correction will be shown in the preview window in its source view as well as on the video overlay and the outputs of the CLIP STER video system Any changes in the color correction and balance area are immediately applied to the selected clip in the timeline In detail the color correction and balance area provides the following control elements and possibilities Color Wheel To the left of the color correction and balance area you can find a color wheel that shows you the color shifts when a color correction is per
276. oftware for example via import and export functions import via the I O Tool and export via the Edit Tool 2 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 2 4 The CLIPSTER Content Browser The CLIPSTER Content Browser shows you the video contents of con figurable drives and directories connected to the CLIPSTER video sys tem Thus you can view the contents of your video hard disk array via thumbnails and in still images as well as see the properties of the clips via text information The database used to display the contents is provided by the CLIPSTER Content Scanner which runs in the system s background It scans the specified drives for new or altered contents which is afterwards imme diately available to the Content Browser In addition to simply showing you the contents of the connected drives the Content Browser can also be used to add clips to the bin of the CLIPSTER software Then it provides nearly the same possibilities as the usage of a file manager The CLIPSTER Configuration Tool For the configuration and setup of the whole video system and the soft ware you can use the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool Here you can set up for example the period for the automatic save function of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties Tools and Services Also part of the CLIPSTER software are various tools that can be used for a more basic configuration of the CLIPSTER
277. ono it does not matter whether the audio track is set to stereo or mono The output on all selected channels will be the same i e the mono audio clip as it is available in the timeline Audio Clip Audio Track Output Mono Mono Mono of clip Mono Stereo Mono of clip mode and the channel s button provide of course no i If the audio clip is in mono the settings for the track s audio function regardless of their setting S If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to mono the clip will be down mixed by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool On all selected channels you will receive the same signal Output Audio Clip Audio Track Channel 1 Channel 2 Stereo Mono Mono of stereo Mono of stereo clip clip If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to stereo the output will depend on the state of the button i e whether the channels are configured as stereo or mono channels When the channels are set to mono a mono signal of the down mixed stereo clip will be provided If the channels are set to stereo a standard stereo signal will be output Output Audio Clip Audio Track Button Channel 1 Channel 2 Stereo Stereo Mono Mono of Mono of button stereo clip stereo clip deactivated Stereo Stereo Stereo Channel 1 Channel 2 button left of right of activated stereo cl
278. ormation file 4 38 4 41 4 42 l 6 MIDONAL greis nae A 2 change eee ee ener 5 27 6 44 delete cccceeeeeeee eens 6 28 6 30 details cs valatedaiantessshinveiaveieesianes 5 26 handler 5 21 5 27 6 45 handler triMmMIng ec 6 47 information 5 26 6 53 6 64 marken era see aee en eee 5 27 setting for timeline 6 28 6 29 setting in bin ssageecceecends 3 6 4 23 setting in source edit mode 3 8 5 19 setting in timeline 3 12 6 45 setting in trim mode 5 25 5 28 6 44 URINE acce 5 27 inpoint entry field 00 5 20 6 28 insert mode 00088 3 8 6 32 6 35 with attached clips 6 51 6 52 insert project 3c cathazssdeereccebieensctacats 8 5 interface for plug ins 2 5 7 9 interlace material deinterlace 7 10 7 41 Internal noiseen 6 12 8 14 K keyboard shortcuts scccedeccsseecdicaenses 6 28 keycode ereere 2 15 L length of audio clips n 6 46 6 47 of clip 3 8 3 12 6 4 6 37 6 46 6 48 7 3 Of timeline sorser 6 2 of timeline elements 0 0 7 3 of transitions e 6 46 6 47 of transitions default 7 6 of video clip nsere 5 21 licensed hard disks oec 4 17 NT EE E ETT 7 26 load DIN hate ttiac beet epee secadeccaesettaes 8 24 default configuration 8 31 preset effects casi ettesietspeemetces 4 33 PROJCCE cee chcesictosntatecteccadesay 8 4 8 5 location of p
279. ou can state the name of a 3D LUT profile Either enter a new name or select an already created profile in the list box to change its name File In this entry field you have to provide the direc tory path and file name of the 3D LUT file You may also click on the button to the right of the entry field E to select the file directly via the opening dialog window Once at least one profile is available in the list box of the window to manage 3D LUT files you can enable it for the CLIPSTER Edit Tool For this the desired profile name has to be selected from the list box and your selection has to be confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL right beside it will close the window for the 3D LUT manage ment without confirming any of the alterations Nevertheless the selected 3D LUT profile and file will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Video 3D LUT is activated which is available in the Options area of the Output settings window Video 3DB LUT Figure 6 20 Activation of the 3D LUT profile Then the selected profile and its 3D LUT file will be applied to the digital video output of the CLIPSTER video system 6 2 9 Cropping the Timeline 6 20 Via the SETTINGS button you can crop the contents EST RSS of your timeline for example if you need black bars in the video output The button is located at the top left side of the time line area and after pressing it the Output settings window is dis pla
280. ou during the positioning of the timeline cursor i When zoomed far into the timeline the timeline cursor pro S e Then press the button EDIT This will cut the clip and set a cutting edit point at the selected position Then you can for example delete one of these clips select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard move it to another position see section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 or alter its properties differently see section Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 When a track is locked see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 its timeline element is not cut The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be i adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 PVs The Timeline 6 4 9 Setting Transitions When at least two clips are present in a video track of the timeline you can set a transition between these two clips After the setting of a tran sition you can change its properties or if applicable prerender the tran sition see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 This section describes in the following the necessary procedures to ap ply transitions to cutting points on the timeline To set a transition the video track s should not be locked see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 To apply a tran
281. outpoint a play out of the timeline will then be per formed between in and outpoint only if set accordingly via the Con figuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Deleting an In Outpoint To delete an in outpoint perform the following e Press the button DELETE to activate the deletion mode for the in and outpoint e Click the in outpoint button EI The in outpoint will be deleted If both are deleted the whole timeline will be available again for a play out PVs The Timeline 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General After adding clips to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 you can begin your editing work by for exam ple altering the sequence of clips cutting clips or defining transitions To view your work on an additionally connected monitor you i have to configure the output format of the timeline accordingly see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 13 Performing editing work on clips in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is very easy because most editing functions are immediately at hand where they are needed most For example the transition proper ties can be accessed directly from its visible part in a video track You can use the video overlay of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool to monitor and check the progress of your work Most of the time the editing work and its output effect can be seen in the vide
282. page 6 20 The rest of the available items in this window i e the items of the areas Name and Format are described in more detail in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide How to Configure the Audio Output The timeline area contains several audio tracks where you can add au dio clips in the desired sequence and set fade ins and outs To output audio via the digital audio outputs of CLIPSTER you have to configure the audio output accordingly The number of audio tracks displayed in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool i can be set freely see section Video and Audio Track Proper ties on page 6 7 By default channel 1 and 2 in stereo mode are set for all tracks as the audio output In the areas preceding the audio tracks you can find the audio routing button R audio routing button for 2nd audio track Figure 6 14 Button to configure the audio output settings Dvs The Timeline With these buttons you can set for each track separately the audio out put After pressing one of the R buttons the following window will be displayed Track properties Timecode 00 00 00 00 Copy to all tracks Output P aths 3 4 5 16 ye Pe PO OK Figure 6 15 Window to configure the audio output settings In the area Audio Mode select whether the audio mode of the track should be in mono or in stereo The CLIPSTER Edit Tool applies the se lected audio mode directly to the respective audio track and it will
283. prop erties which offer you additional editing features for your work These editing features are available in the form of effects operators Depend ing on the overall configuration of the CLIPSTER video system and the optional features installed there may be numerous operators available that enhance the editing functionality of CLIPSTER These operators can be programmed as plug ins by anyone who wants to have special editing operators for his work via the freely available CLIPSTER Software Development Kit If you know how to develop software via C and you want i to write special editing operators of your own you can receive the CLIPSTER Software Development Kit and further informa tion about this from the DVS service department Once the operators are installed with the special and easy to handle plug in interface of CLIPSTER they can be accessed in the effects pane the same way as the already available operators see section Effects on page 4 28 As a developer of CLIPSTER operators itself DVS offers for CLIPSTER optionally available operators as well as already included ones in every CLIPSTER software delivery default installment The operators offered by DVS are as follows Effects Operator Installment Description 1st Color Correc default This operator provides various con tion trols to perform a primary col or gamma correction to the clips in the timeline Furthermore you can assign a static look up
284. ps are checked for inconsistencies It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the video hard disks However frames missing in between the first and the last frame are not verified automatically If a clip is played out where frames are missing the missing frames will be substituted by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool automatically with a standard image Figure 6 52 Substitute image for a missing frame Then it is best to check your bin and thus your timeline for inconsisten cies more thoroughly with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 25 This menu option will provide you with a list of the clips where frames are missing After that either the whole clip or the missing frames should be replaced or re corded anew PVs The Timeline 6 5 4 Time Stretching or Compression of Video Clips Video clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or compressed in real time with common interpolations frame field repetition or skip ping of frames fields Time stretching or compression allows you to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for instance for slow fast motion purposes or to match your project s pace For this the respective timeline element can be automatically resized in the timeline left in its original size set via the clip s in and outpoint or adjusted to the de sired length manually in the timeline You can configure the time stret
285. r additional saving types such as bit depth and or byte order settings If provided by the format select from the Type combo box in the Op tions area the desired additional saving type S bit BGR In the area Format you have to state the further output formats of your clip to be generated There you can find the following items On the left side of the area Video you can see several buttons With them and with the list box below the buttons choose one of the predefined video formats for the rendering The project s timeline will then be rendered to this format Select a button to display the available formats in the list box below Then select from the list box the desired format This format will be shown on the right side of the area Video in the editable resolution fields and if appropri ate the pulldown items will be made available SD HD Film Vesa Resolution Type Rate Group 8 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs If you have selected a YUV format as the file format the YUV range setting has to be applied It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Full The same applies to the RGB range setting If you have se lected an RGB file format this setting will be evaluated It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Full Further information about
286. r the internal timeline timecode should be given out as a timecode signal or the source timecode provided by the files Nonetheless regarding source timecode there are some peculiarities re garding the way CLIPSTER deals with source timecodes Some of them are detailed in the following 7 Currently of all file formats supported by the CLIPSTER soft i ware only the dpx file format is checked for and provided with additional information such as source timecode The image files capable of storing timecode information usually provide space for one timecode only in their header generic source timecode However because CLIPSTER is able to receive for example during a record several timecodes incorporated in signals at various connectors it uses more than just one timecode During a write procedure i e when recording clips via the CLIPSTER I O Tool CLIPSTER will write all received timecode information into the file headers The ones addition ally received will be stored at a location for user defined data in the header and usually cannot be interpreted and used by other applica tions than CLIPSTER When processing such clips afterwards for instance with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can select between the various timecodes provided by a clip which may give you more control over their position in the timeline In the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software you can configure the general way the CLIPSTER software should
287. rce TC was selected but the clips provide no timecode the clips in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Likewise the frame number viewing for the timeline see section Configuring the Timeline Scale on page 6 10 has no effect on the source timecodes displayed by the clips i e you will still see the respective source timecodes for the clips 6 2 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output 6 12 To output video and audio and to view your project s timeline with a monitor connected to CLIPSTER you have to configure the output for mat of the timeline accordingly Both the video and audio output can be configured freely The Timeline How to Configure the Video Output With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Here you can also set the size of the video and or audio tracks as well as adjust their numbers There is also a set ting available that performs an autoscaling of the material in the time line if its resolution differs from the configured output raster After pressing the button SETTINGS the following window will be dis played on the screen Output settings Internal o HVTTL HF VF 1920 x 1080 i 30 192 gt tio Figure 6 13 Window to set the output settings Set the video output settings accordingly Usually all outputs of CLIP STER except the SD outputs will change their output format respec tively
288. re a frame accurate editing preroll gt 1 sec edit lag 7 frames postroll 1 sec CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 6 System Maintenance This section contains topics related to system maintenance work Carry out the described tasks whenever necessary A 6 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process The CLIPSTER video system provides an automatic defragmentation process for the connected video hard disk array that defragments pre viously copied or recorded data on the video storage so that it is more suited for real time operations another tool the DVS Defragmenter that can be used to de fragment individual clips for play out purposes Further infor mation about this as well as about the special assessment used to indicate a fragmentation can be found in the DVS Defrag menter user guide that can be accessed via the PDF files of the software s online help i The automatic defragmentation process is supplemented by Starting the Process The automatic defragmentation process is automatically started to gether with the CLIPSTER software After starting the software it is running in the background of the system and operates during stand still times lt 7 The automatic starting behavior of the defragmentation tool of Li the CLIPSTER software can be enabled or disabled via the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information
289. rea For this perform the following e Move the outer right edge of the tool area to the left or to the right with the mouse Then you will be able to view for example the thumbnails of clips present in the bin together with all their text information Name Qs Resolutior Color dept Colormod Aspect rati Framerate Audio cha Figure 4 2 Adjusting the size of the tool area horizontally If you pull the right edge completely to the left the tool area i will no longer be visible and thus can be turned off If you pull the right edge completely to the right the control area will be hidden and you can see horizontally the contents of the respec tive tool in full Additionally you can alter the size of the tool area vertically e Move the lower edge of the tool and control area which is also the upper edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to enlarge or reduce the areas Figure 4 3 Adjusting the size of the tool area vertically The vertical size of the tool and control area will adjust itself automati cally which will also affect the size of the timeline area see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 for further in formation 4 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 2 The Bin After starting the CLIPSTER software and thus the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area If the bin is not displayed in the tool area of
290. rea In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area the scrub bar of the con trol area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project It can also be used to move within your project The Timeline scrub bar with cursor Figure 6 31 The scrub bar There are several ways to move within your project with the scrub bar of the control area Select the scrub bar cursor HESS with the mouse and move it to the left or right to the desired position Click anywhere below or above the scrub bar to position the scrub bar cursor there instantly Click on a position on the scrub bar outside the visible part of the timeline to move the scrub bar cursor there instantly You can also move the visible part of the timeline on the scrub bar to the left or right with the mouse to select another part of the timeline in the timeline area for viewing Further information about the scrub bar can be found in sec tion The Scrub Bar of the Control Area on page 5 9 Other Ways to Move within the Timeline For a frame accurate moving or to play out and review the timeline you may use the controls of the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool With them you can jump to cutting points and timeline markers or step one frame for or backwards They are in detail described in section Con trols on page 5 11 Of course via a play out you can also move within the timeline There are several ways to play out the time
291. react to certain elements in the video and audio tracks of the timeline snapping mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool to allow for an automated positioning You can de activate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Further information about the snap ping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 To delete a control point select from its context menu the menu option Remove control point see also section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 65 When you move the control point up or down you can turn up or down the volume of the respective clip If you want to create audio peaks or fade in or out audio you have to create more than one control point and set them accordingly There is no limit in the total number of control points and new ones can be cre ated as described above As an example the following figure shows an audio project with control points set to create fades 6 67 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Master t01 220z Figure 6 59 Fades achieved with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool To control the setting of a control point the CLIPSTER Edit Tool shows you its current volume level in decibel via a tooltip Simply move the mouse cursor over a control point to view its setting Figure 6 60 Decibel setting of control point The decibel scale of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is as follows Decibel I
292. render the whole timeline Render from In Out InfOut Directly below the combo box Render from you can find the combo box Generic timecode With it you select the timecode type that should be written as the source timecode into the file if supported by the file format During the finalizing the selected timecode will then be written as the source timecode to the location in the file s header espe cially reserved for that kind of meta data Afterwards the finalized clip will contain the selected source timecode and it can then be used by ap plications that support source timecode The following settings are available for the combo box Generic timecode Selection Meaning Internal The internal timecode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline is written to the correct location in the file header i e afterwards the internal timecode of the timeline is provided by the file as its source timecode Source TC The source timecode provided by the clips al ready present in the timeline is written to the file s header as its source timecode i e if the clips already provided source timecode it will be preserved Clips without source timecode in formation do not receive a timecode The Menus Currently of all file formats supported by the CLIPSTER soft i ware only the dpx file format is provided with source time code information To use the combo box Generic timecode the Format combo box
293. reo channel multiple channels the ad ditional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 6 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 Configuring the Timeline Because the timeline is the most important part of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool it can be configured freely and thus adapted to your individual needs For a more comfortable working with the Edit Tool you can change the layout of the timeline area in various ways You can also ad just the timeline scale to the needs of your project e g by defining a special offset Furthermore you have to define the necessary output format of the timeline for example to view your project on a monitor connected to CLIPSTER or to play out the timeline All this will be de scribed in the following sections Most configurations and settings will be stored together with i your project in a project file 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area 6 6 Because in the timeline area most of the editing work is performed you can change its layout freely to adapt it to your personal needs for a more comfortable working The layout of the timeline area can be changed in several ways for example by adjusting the size of the video and audio tracks Changing the Area Size Manually You can change the size of the timeline area manually For this move the upp
294. rerender data a se 2 14 of proxy data s e 2 14 of storage spoina 4 16 locking tracks cecce 6 34 PVs Index log dropS cs scsctecetreresssanias 4 39 4 44 of color correction n 5 3 look up table oce 3 15 7 9 A 3 MONO eaedvecsessacasearwesteteigaateerSecbeeas 6 15 sample files u 7 23 MOVING clips oessa 6 35 setting of 1D LUT n se 7 22 mul i clip eseese 4 14 A 3 setting of 3D LUT o ae 6 18 eLO IO EE 4 9 4 15 setting of static LUT n 7 22 properties octuatcintacaccenseee 4 15 4 24 specification 1D LUT A 10 multiple channels audio 4 14 6 4 6 5 Lera o E 5 13 6 64 TOW E T EE 7 25 7 39 multi threaded I O mode 4 38 4 39 lUa 2cdaditividivedievadiiasiwcnateices 5 5 5 7 4 48 UM INANCE nccc 7 35 muting tracks eeen 6 34 LUT see 3D LUT N see look up table name of Clip naese 4 24 6 54 6 65 M naming tracks ccecce 6 24 new maintenance cc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 12 DIM siesctenceceaccheinssacaeceeec cane sumsken 8 25 marker timeline 4 35 4 39 4 43 folder cscs 4 9 4 18 4 44 6 49 PrOjEC sisccisiiretiriorriisiii iiaia raant 8 3 GOIN crrorosisiio snaa 6 49 next cutting point eeen 5 13 configuration eee 6 50 No thumbnails ieee 6 9 de lete concoction 6 50 NOLES ainar eeecee 1 6 MOVIE tO scce 5 13 6 49 project management 2 14 POSITION atcestessecesinisastiimtareocecae 4 35 number OF tracks eee 6 7 SOM oee 4 36 table aana e E A 4 35 O marking of clips scocrietecu
295. rerendered data for i each project differently via the Configuration Tool of the CLIP STER software on the tab Project group Project field Path for temporary data see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information When working with prerendering you may get data on the hard disks that is no longer necessary for your current project but occupying a lot of disk space This will happen for example as soon as a timeline ele ment was prerendered and afterwards deleted or changed Even a switching of the video format will make the already prerendered data obsolete due to the fact that the extra images may no longer coincide with the newly selected format As long as you work on the project the no longer necessary files remain on your video workstation Only when you close the project the obsolete temporary data will be deleted mz To recognize the prerendered data belonging to one project i easily it is recommended to store it project specific for each project separately For further information about this please re fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 Related to a prerendering of timeline elements are the Preren der all and Clean temp dir menu options on the menu Project see section Prerender all on page 8 20 and section Clean temp dir on page 8 21 as well as the section Real time Capability of Clips on page 4 15 and section Preren dering of Timeline Elements on page
296. ro Furthermore you may omit the colons full stops However then you should observe that no digits are left out With omitted colons full stops the en tered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last two numbers indicate the frame the next two the seconds etc Examples 1 9 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 109 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 247 jumps to 2 sec frame 47 00 00 03 23 when raster is in 24p Additionally in most timecode frame number fields of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you can enter a new val ue by either adding or subtracting the timecode or the frame amount from the given entry For this simply add the timecode or frame amount with a minus or plus sign to the given entry in the timecode frame number field After that press En ter to confirm your entry Examples 1 23 2 05 jumps to 4 sec frame 4 4 04 53 jumps to 1 sec frame 23 the CLIPSTER software can also be used to switch between timecode and frame nota tion see section Configuring the Time line Scale on page 6 10 i Most timecode frame number fields of PVs The Control Area 5 4 The Source Edit Mode mm If you drag either a video or audio clip from the bin to the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool the software chang es to the source edit mode control area Figure 5 13 Drag and drop of clip to control area The clip in the bin is neither removed nor deleted when it is dragged to the control area It will
297. ro vide the same features as the ones of the primary color correction a de scription of them can be found in section The Operator 1st Color Correction on page 7 22 However when using these controls only the selected color vector will be affected The remaining item not already described is the button RESET RESET The button RESET sets all controls and the color wheel of the color correction and balance area back to their de fault values and states PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 11 The Operator Delnterlace The operator Delnterlace enables you to convert interlaced material fields on your video system into the progressive image format frames If the deinterlace operator is used on a clip it has to be preren dered prior to a play out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Method Parameter Delnterlace threshold Motion threshold Line duplication OQ Even x 2nd Color Line interpolation Odd x Delnterlace Q Motion adaptive Modify all Reset Figure 7 33 Deinterlace operator This section describes in detail the settings provided by this operator The items available under the heading Method determine the type of method used for the deinterlacing Only one radio button i e method can be selected at a time Line duplication This method simply duplicates in the image the line selected in the Parameter area meaning that either the odd or the even lines
298. rop table as well as the table controls are dimmed the performance monitor is turned off Then in the middle of the chart provided that enough of the tool area is visible as well as in the status bar the message Performance Monitor disabled will be dis played Then to measure the workload of the system with the perfor mance monitor you have to enable it first via the Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information taneously multi threaded I O mode Therefore one bar iJ CLIPSTER is able to process several different image files simul shown in the chart may represent several file accesses S Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the CLIPSTER software it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information The Tool Area As soon as the software is started the performance monitor will write by default a drop report into the subdirectory drop_reports under the directory log available in the CLIPSTER software s installation path default C Program Files DVS Clipster There will be one report written per CLIPSTER session However it will provide you with information about all drops that occurred during this session only when the performance monitor is enabled Then the report contains informa tion about for e
299. roperties 0 0 0 0 eee 7 5 7 5 Properties of a Transition oi ceci lt cessacnececesicceancasdicsssusscereatenssenete 7 6 7 6 Properties of a Video Clip eeesceeeeceeereererereeerreens 7 9 76 1 Adding Effects cissi necrn orrein aas 7 10 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeerreerrrrreeeereee 7 12 7 6 3 Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area eeen 7 14 7 7 The Operator Zoom Pan vcsscsssscessethsetesnsessetesceaeesetasepacte 7 16 FAN The Items for Zooming getecsssc setesdicediscwntetrediceiecseddziats 7 16 7 7 2 The Items for PANN Ss cescceascadecaierarcctercecteesvesdiet laces 7 17 7 7 3 Whe Advanced Settings ccecce 7 18 7 3 The Operator Flip FIOD aisnisrrinnaninroneiinnerina 7 21 7 9 The Operator 1st Color Correction s 7 22 Poe stati OT eaa e a i 7 22 7 9 2 Master Luma Chroma eerren 7 23 7 9 3 Global jacaciesedacecteass esaticen bet iatlndtecaderiloceeiecasededenbceeds 7 25 7 9 4 Lift Gamma Gain ener ene ene ene eee cere ree er aeee 7 26 7 10 The Operator 2nd Color Correction eects 7 27 7 10 1 Usage of the Secondary Color Correction 00 7 27 7410 2 Color Vector LISD oocecazececuecenteeeeesseedected eget aiaa 7 30 7 10 3 The Color Mask Area ceecee 7 31 7 10 4 The Color Correction and Balance Area 0cee 7 37 7 11 The Operator Delnterlace i e 7 41 The Menus Foes ceecic scree retacra sas etree gecncpoiens terete tetas oleae 8 1 8 1 The Menu of the CLIPSTER ICON 8 2 8 1 1 M
300. rops If the message Performance Monitor disabled is displayed in the mid dle of the chart right below the 50 line and or in the status bar the performance monitor is deactivated Figure 4 23 Message provided by the chart that the monitor is disabled In such a case most of the controls and the drop table will be disabled as well To use the performance monitor you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information PVs The Tool Area 4 5 2 Chart Controls With the chart controls you can control the appearance of the chart or create a DVS proprietary information file The chart controls provide the following items 7 Ifthe controls appear dimmed the performance monitor is dis i abled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Con figurations user guide for more information When viewing the history of the workload in the chart with the history slider see below you can re turn at any time to the current status of the perfor mance monitor where the chart is continuously updated in real time with this button The slider to the right of the UPDATE button deter mines the viewing resolution of the chart When pulled to the left you will receive a higher resolu tion The bars displayed in the chart will get thinner and more bars
301. rtcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change the viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Via the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options i Defaults group General you can set the way the CLIP STER Edit Tool performs a zooming on the timeline There you can set whether zooming should occur on the position of the timeline cursor or on the current viewing position of the time line For our example project we aim at having only two clips in the video track For this it is best to view the complete contents of the timeline e If appropriate use the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area to zoom out of your project For this move the left slider to the left until you see the complete timeline When you have changed the view of the timeline you will see a screen like the following 3 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Figure 3 6 Project in timeline The buttons right in front of the timeline tracks video as well i as audio determine whether a track is muted barred from an output button M or locked barred from ed
302. s are explained in section The Advanced Settings on page 7 18 7 7 2 The Items for Panning To achieve a panning for the currently selected clip two sliders are at your disposal x lt Be 0 0 T Figure 7 12 The items for panning With them you can move for instance in a zoomed clip to the part of the clip image that should be displayed during a play out For exam ple if you move the X slider to the left the image will move to the left and if you move the Y slider to the left it moves up Slider Slider Image Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range left negative Xx right positive 7 17 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Slider Slider Image Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range left negative right positive As already indicated in the table above to the right of the sliders you can find entry fields where you can specify either the image movement factor or the movement in pixels manually Simply enter the respective value with the appropriate sign as specified in the table to pan the im age The factor and pixel range entries have to be set in dependence on the settings made for zooming 7 7 3 The Advanced Settings 7 18 Below the items for panning you can find a combo box to determine the filter used for zooming as well as two sliders to set the rotation and sharpness Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture
303. s can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide By using the menu option Analyzer off the selected video scope can be turned off again at any time The color of the graphs as well as the drawn data for vector i scopes and the YUV parade only can be adapted to your needs via the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool Please refer to the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for further information amp The Control Area Vectorscope 100 The vectorscope 100 is most suited when playing out in YUV It dis plays the chroma information of an output image without its luma in formation i e the color components U and V without Y Figure 5 6 The vectorscope 100 This scope shows a circular graph where the center represents no chro ma color saturation zero All white black and gray parts of the output image are located at the center of the graph The more the color values of an image increase the farther away the graph s dots will be dis persed from the center Regarding color the abbreviations R G and B of the video scope indicate the usual primary colors red green and blue while Mg stands for magenta Cy for cyan and YI for yellow secondary colors The color distribution in a vectorscope is the same as in a color wheel as for example in the secondary color correction see section The Operator 2nd Color Correction on page 7 27 Vectorscope 75 The vectorscope 75 is the same
304. s of the CLIPSTER software were developed by third parties If you have pur chased these with your CLIPSTER a description of them will be provided via an extra documentation which will be included in the delivery of CLIPSTER 7 6 1 Adding Effects 7 10 As soon as a video clip is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area Then the clip is ready to receive an effects operator If the properties area is not visible in the user interface of the i CLIPSTER Edit Tool you have to display it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 To the left of the timeline element properties area you can find the Ef fects list of the selected clip It contains a list of all effects operators that are currently applied to the clip Timeline Element Properties Effects Zoom Pan ist Color C Flip Flop 2nd Color C Zoom Pan Delnterlace Figure 7 5 Effects list of a video clip The effects operator Zoom Pan is by default available for all video clips in the timeline and thus is already available in the effects list of the timeline element properties However the same effect with different settings as well as additional effects can be applied to the clip To add an effect to a clip in the timeline perform the following e If appropriate activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the CLIP STER
305. s of the video clip in the timeline It is by default available and active for all clips in the timeline and thus the first operator visible in the timeline element properties area after it has been accessed Effects XxX Zoom Pan Zoom amp Pan Rotation Width I Height EE Lock x Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation I Figure 7 10 Zoom and pan operator This section describes in detail the settings that this operator provides 7 7 1 The Items for Zooming With the sliders for width and height you can adjust the zooming Sim ply pull the sliders to the left to zoom out of the clip or to the right to zoom in Width Height Lock Figure 7 11 The items for zooming 7 16 PVs Timeline Element Properties Additionally you can enter either the zoom factor or the pixel size that the original frames should provide in the respective entry fields to the right of the sliders manually Slider Slider Morena Result Factor Range Width left zoom out lt 1 Height right zoom in gt 1 With the check box Lock activated the original aspect ratio the rela tion of width x and height y of the video format can be preserved If enabled the images will neither get stretched nor compressed and the remaining value will adjust itself automatically The way a zooming out of the video clip is performed can be i influenced with the combo box Filter Its setting
306. selected effect to the clip whose properties are dis played in the area of the timeline element properties When the effect is selected from the effects list its controls will be available in the set tings pane to the right e With the controls of the primary color correction available adjust for example the contrast brightness or gamma of the clip The changes are immediately applied to the clip in the timeline With this step our example project is now complete and you can play out your timeline in the selected output format button SETTINGS or perform other editing tasks iJ If you need an operator to be applied only to a limited range of frames of a clip you have to edit the clip with hard cuts be forehand because the effects operators are valid for a whole timeline clip always Some effects are not real time capable Prior to a play out their application to a clip in the timeline has to be rendered see sec tion Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 An effect can be deleted from the effects list of a clip the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Just select the effect from the effects list in the timeline element properties and press the key Del on your keyboard Getting Started k S A once set and configured effect can also be used as a template effect preset effect for other clips in the timeline Then you can use the same effect settings several times in this project
307. senes 6 12 edit mode 00000 2 7 5 1 5 11 with audio clips s 2siccescicaciastenesd 6 65 edit point file system nsss 3 4 4 7 see cutting point TD TASTET scisathenaeeersaraaee segaunanan 6 13 Edit Tool sz xivavivcieveiciessastiadiees Ded DO filM l0Ok serisisisireriiireniie 6 18 editing csusedaveraceenia 2 5 4 28 7 1 7 9 filter ise ate eee 7 18 3 4 pONt nasas 6 37 finalizing 0000s 2 12 8 11 EDL seeen 2 3 8 7 A 2 audio format aeee 8 18 timecode nnsssseeiniirsreerrrrreren 8 9 audio output ai sacuctecscesdaoieaias 8 17 ENEOU meore n ee EE 3 14 4 28 SUNOS CHIC sa ccicassdscaseasecnsceecentavess 8 17 see also preset effect Channels ccceeeeeees 8 18 8 19 apply noonoo 3 15 4 28 7 10 color space range cecce 8 16 delete from clip 3 16 7 13 7 14 file format sicociecsalaecccadntsaneed 8 15 disable n s 7 13 frame numbering sssr 8 12 effects list a 7 10 pulldown nsss 8 16 enable Seiceutecedetes neiceatiete ee 7 13 resizing of material 22 cssss0 0 8 17 IMPONE cca esteteapeananevshanseecnaaees 4 33 resolution ceecee 8 16 SEQUENCE Anemone 7 13 saving types sicuissseecececstiepiavices 8 15 Settings nonoo 4 29 7 12 7 14 source timecode scce 8 14 BOI a EAT 4 34 SUAT srice 8 11 8 20 title bar dessinaire 4 34 storage of audio files 8 20 effects list ccccccssccccssssssssssseeeseees 7 10 storage of video files 8 12 embedded audio 006 6 13 6 17 VIDEO format s es 8
308. settings of an ef fect over and over again in the timeline A proxy is a down scaled clip of high resolution data that will be internally used by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool as a substitute for its original material to ensure a real time working environment By activating or deactivating proxies you decide whether the real time capable material is used or the high resolution data A slider cursor on a bar that you can use to scrub To shuttle or perform a fast image search run Timecode information stored in the header of an image file e g dpx You can use the source timecodes for example in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool instead of the internal rela tive timecode provided by the timeline If a clip does not contain source timecode information it can be virtually provided with one Material at the end of a clip that is available but neither used nor visible in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool due to an outpoint adjust ment trimming Position indicator of the timeline Video and audio clips or operators that are visi ble in the tracks of the timeline A transition effect between two video clips To add timeline elements to other video tracks in the timeline than the first one When different timeline elements occupy the same space at the same time in the timeline the contents of a play out can be easily changed at that particular position A folder directory of the Windows file system that contains
309. sing white area 7 6 PVs Timeline Element Properties Crossfade Dissolve 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 22 23 24 25 MA ARV XN a mfols ojej sia Bd Pa oP BME Da 213 Ys hb WV 4 226 231 232 233 234 235 236 Hien p Z __ ae 241 242 243 244 251 252 253 254 409 r S 207 Figure 7 4 SMPTE wipes of CLIPSTER 7 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS After selecting one of the available wipes you have further possibilities at hand to adjust the transition Item Description Softness Use the Softness slider and the percentage value to its right to adjust the softness feathering of the wipe Then the edges of the emerging image appear softer so that they blend into the receding image with less contrast With the slider you can set the softness to values between O and 100 However with the percentage value to the right of the slider you can select even greater values than 100 Either enter the softness in percent manually or use the controls to the right of the entry field to step the val ue up or down until it is set as desired Start The Start entry field indicates in percent the starting point of the transition If adjusted the operator will begin the transition at a later point of its phases to blend into the receding image If this value is greater than the value set in the End entry field the transi
310. sinns 6 49 slow MOTION cceeeeee eee 6 55 6 57 snapping mode 3 8 3 11 6 35 SOTLNESS noscere 7 8 7 33 7 36 Software Development Kit 7 9 software modules ccecce 2 2 2 9 software structure cccecceeeeeees 2 2 sorting clips in bin gente atavsecrteeveittiotecart 4 22 EN ECIS orrea 4 34 folders in bin nocscscccccrcren 4 18 timeline markers ccce 4 36 source Material c cccceeeeeeeeees 6 54 eXpOrt ecce 5 22 5 24 6 59 frame position n 6 58 Source TC A a E 6 12 8 14 A 4 finalizing cash ea tteceteeeetlesecascuenas 8 14 DENENG pesis riire nE 2 15 Virtual aa 2 16 6 12 8 9 source edit mode 2 7 3 8 5 11 5 15 synchronize with timeline 5 19 stack occire eaan 6 62 starting of program seese 3 2 starting point clip 3 8 6 3 6 4 6 5 starting point transition 7 8 status IMMESSABES ccce 2 10 performance monitor 4 38 4 42 o ol o E A reese e ee 6 15 storage CApAC tY ceee 1 6 Contents ccceeceeceeeeeees 2 4 4 11 disk space eessen 2 12 2 13 liCEnNSE aaarnas anasa 4 17 location s2cccecarncacesezestsenedescednee 4 16 synchronization s 6 15 6 50 System base video directory 4 17 T tab eee ecececceecececceceeceseeeesaeaeeneeeeaeaes 4 1 e a ENE PE ETE EEA 4 4 Effects oo cceececeeceececeeeeceseeeees 4 28 Markers cccaeccceiccsvectiedexedeeeshiete 4 35 Perform oo ccecceceecececceceeceseeeeees 4 37 table
311. site the hard disk array can be connected to a CLIPSTER eas ily and the material is instantly recognized by the system It can be pro cessed right away 7 Of course a DVS CineReel can also be used to transport large i projects between CLIPSTER and another digital disk recorder for example the Pronto2K by DVS The menu option Update CineReel on the Project menu checks whether a DVS CineReel is connected to the video system Then in the bin a folder with the name CineReel is created and the film material on the hard disk array is referenced to this folder In the newly created folder of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s bin the directory structure on the DVS CineReel is imitated in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and for each clip present on the hard disk array a thumbnail preview will be available You can then work with the data immediately With the menu option Update CineReel no copying process i of any kind is initiated Only representations of the clips with references to the externally connected DVS CineReel are creat ed in the bin of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Furthermore the DVS CineReel as a storage for video material will be far too slow for editing purposes in real time e g transitions Therefore it is recommended to copy the material to the video hard disk array of CLIPSTER before processing Do not reference video material on one DVS CineReel with AN CLIPSTER and then connect another DVS CineReel without saving the project first Only
312. sition to a cutting point perform the following e Move the timeline cursor to the cutting point between the two clips with the respective controls of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool e g EE ME see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 and section Controls on page 5 11 If you activate the trim mode the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point see section The Trim Mode on page 5 25 This will make the button TRANS available in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool user interface Toseta transition there must be enough head and or tail avail i able of at least one clip to make a blending possible otherwise the button TRANS will be unavailable You can create the nec essary head and tail manually by adjusting the in and outpoint of clips see section Changing the In and Outpoints of Clips on page 6 44 If you are in the overwrite mode of the timeline the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will create the head and tail for the transition auto matically This means that parts of the clips will be moved for the transition Due to the moving of the clips the creation of a transition in the overwrite mode may cause gaps in the time line More information about the overwrite mode can be found in section Overwrite Mode on page 6 33 e Select the button TRANS A transition appears between the two clips by default set to a Cross fade wipe and usually of one second length
313. sitions in the Timeline on page 6 49 Furthermore with the controls below the table you can for example save the results shown in the drop table to a file see section The Table Controls on page 4 44 4 5 5 The Table Controls With the table controls below the drop table you can for example save the results written in the drop table to a file or set markers in the time line of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool where drops occurred Additional information about timeline markers can be found in L section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 The following controls are available This button saves the entries in the drop table to a file Enter in the opening dialog window a storage path and a file name for the drop table list to be saved Then confirm your settings with the button SAVE and the table will be saved to the specified location zn Compared to the drop report saved by de i fault by the performance monitor this _ button only saves the entries currently available in the drop table see section The Performance Monitor on page 4 37 As soon as the real time operation is finished and when drops have occurred the button MARK ALL will be available With it you can retrieve further in formation about the locations where drops oc curred It places timeline markers in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool for each entry available in the drop table After selecting this button it wil
314. solution of the clip to be rendered and gener ated As the fields indicate with CLIPSTER you can alter the resolution to any format you like and the new clip will be present in this resolution Use the Resolution fields to change the height and width of the clip Resolution 0 Frame rate 0 interlaced Aspect ratio 4 Dominance Even fields The Menus 7n The Frame rate entry field will be evaluated only if a file for i mat is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the specified timecode will provide the entered frame rate as the source timecode s frame rate Use the combo box for the field mode to select whether your original material is in interlaced progressive or segmented frames format Via the entry field Aspect ratio you can change the aspect ratio of your image content and thus compress or stretch the image The aspect ratio value should be entered as the value of the x axis divided by the value of the y axis Aspect ratio x y Last but not least select the dominance of your interlaced material from the combo box Dominance The Odd fields value starts with the second video field of the interlaced image while the value Even fields begins with the first video field The Auto Scale and Original Aspect Ratio check boxes enable you to scale and resize your original video material Both settings are con cerned with the video format of the clips in the timeline and t
315. sosci ce cocrtesasieain 3 7 6 2 PVs Index add clip of certain length 6 37 timeline element n A 4 arrange clips ccce 6 35 delete range in timeline 6 39 blue line sisiisrisiricisiivirisisisisisi 6 29 d FATON sizsceteuntatescagscseiaseesdocases 7 3 change contents ceee 6 62 length eeen 7 3 changing appearance s es 6 6 properties lt jacseniuacts 2 5 3 15 7 1 check for inconsistencies 8 4 8 24 eSIZE a 6 57 8 25 timeline element properties 7 1 close gap sesso cheese teen 6 36 FT 6 ee ee 7 2 configuration cesses 6 6 GLOSS ick cic eateeect ese acne aeetee sts 7 5 ONO coc cosceneci at seen sped inde 6 25 effect settings oeenn 7 12 COpy Clip eos sce ceases watesenceduccees 6 37 effects list 7 10 create EDU pripiciienauiaiattinoi 8 7 length of element 2c22 ccecesvcesscsss 7 3 laoo T 6 20 of transitions sarieassezevsaniecssanasasss 7 6 delete Clip senisesse 6 54 6 65 of video CHS sesser 7 9 delete volume control point 6 65 VESET sdis iiome ietaises 7 4 duration ccceceeeee esas 2 10 6 2 timeline marker 4 35 4 39 4 43 4 44 enable 3D LUT file 2 c s100 033 6 20 6 49 enable cropping n 6 23 erelo ti nTa E 6 49 feal o E E T 6 36 configuration eeen 6 50 in outpoint 6 28 6 29 6 45 delete na ee 6 50 inconsistencies a 6 56 Moving to ceee 5 13 6 49 indicator line 6 36 6 43 POSIMOW M 4 35 length indicator occ 6 2 SONG socere n arr E 4
316. ss of your work The no longer necessary files are marked for deletion only and remain on your video workstation until you close the project or remove them with the Clean temp dir menu option While continuing your work on the project the Clean temp dir menu option enables you to clean your temporary directory of files no longer needed and marked for a deletion It is best to handle and administer the temporary data project i specific meaning for each project in a different temporary stor age location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the l prerendered files will not be recognized by the CLIPSTER Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for a play out nor will they be deleted via the Clean temp dir menu option They have to be deleted man ually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Man ually on page A 14 8 2 12 Exit 8 22 The menu option Exit ends the current CLIPSTER Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole CLIPSTER software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or a play out operation beforehand Otherwise the re spective task may get interrupted This clos
317. st frame file in a video di rectory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail the clip s in point will be set accordingly You may select more than one video directory in the file man ager and drag them to the contents area of the bin The respec tive clips will all be added to the bin You can also add clips to the bin via the menu option Add Clip on the context menu of the contents area Via the context menu of a clip in the bin either audio or video you can call up the clip s properties Most of these can only be altered if the clip is not already present in the timeline When adding a clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure A or the menu option Add Clip its properties may not be dis amp cerned by the CLIPSTER software properly due to missing file header information For example when adding a yuv clip its color space is automatically set to YUV the field mode to Interlaced the color space range to Head etc because this will most likely be the case when using a true YUV file If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the hard disks you have to call them up and change them accord ingly 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline 3 6 For the editing process the CLIPSTER Edit Tool uses a timeline with sev eral video and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for in stance define wipes dissolves or cuts for t
318. stieiaisteen 4 16 master OCK oinei oaea 6 34 open master MUTE seirer 6 34 Dim eaa a E 8 24 Matching a frame ce0 6 54 6 58 project nocccccccerrree 8 4 8 5 mMenu Dar sosiaa 2 7 8 1 open platform n se 8 29 CLIPSTER ICON ceeceeseeeeeees 8 2 Operator nece 4 28 7 1 A 3 help P EE A E E E T 2 10 embedded leannanan annann A 2 PC pe ote E ET E EA 7 39 prerendering EEE 2 14 6 42 minimizing the user interface 8 2 Set Settings ooieoe 7 12 mirroring the video image 7 9 7 21 temporary data prerender ee 2 13 missing frames 4 39 4 40 6 56 8 25 6 42 mixing audio 2 s2issccesscoeeaetaestssctess 6 16 transitions o on 6 41 mode optional features 2 5 4 28 6 18 7 1 COI ecseecdeteseesteensieees 2 7 5 1 5 11 7 9 fine tuning seee 3 8 6 36 options of CLIPSTER csceccecceeees 1 2 INSENT cr serenniutiekri sa 3 8 6 32 6 35 outpoint ETATE 3 8 6 4 6 5 A 3 overwrite e 3 8 6 33 6 35 change n se 5 27 6 44 Sla VE lt osuuhevucedieiviesvhiuutsdatewee ets 5 11 delete ccccccccccccecccecceceee 6 28 6 30 SNAPPING seeee 3 8 3 11 6 35 details x ccccececc castaccesebecvesassenses 5 26 source edit 2 7 3 8 5 11 5 15 handler a s a 5 21 5 27 6 45 trim 2 7 3 14 5 11 5 25 6 44 handler trimming 068 6 47 modules ccc ceccc eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeaes 2 9 information 5 26 6 54 6 65 MOITE ccosececseeeeccstseccacens deeeeeaccceenee 7 19 Marker o oo ccccccccccc
319. t the menu option Show properties Alternatively you can double click a timeline element in the timeline directly to close the properties This will close the properties area and afterwards the audio tracks will be visible again in the user interface of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool 7 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 5 Properties of a Transition As soon as a transition is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area If the properties area is not visible in the user interface of the i CLIPSTER Edit Tool you have to display it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 By default a transition is set to one second length provided that enough head or tail are available during the setting procedure and as a wipe Crossfade is selected This can be changed via the properties of a transition easily Transition type 0 Crossfade rizontalExpand Figure 7 3 Transition properties In the properties of the transition you can select another wipe for the transition than the default one from the Transition type list box The following lists the transitions that are currently implemented The num bers indicate the SMPTE number which are provided in the Transition type list box as well The graphics show the effects of the respective wipe and if not iJ reversed the transition occurs towards the increa
320. terial on the hard disks you have to call them up and change them accord ingly The Clip Types You can add video audio and so called multi clips to the contents area of the bin video clip Video clips are seen in the contents area of the bin usually with their thumbnail previews When a clip is se lected a scrub bar below the thumbnail will be available that can be used to preview the clip in still images and se lect an inpoint of the clip roughly if en abled via the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool 4 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs audio clip invalid clip multi clips To use audio in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool you have to make the files available the same way as with video files You have to add them to the bin as described in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 7 CLIPSTER supports audio clips that contain more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels in the au dio file These clips will be available as one clip in the bin but when added to the timeline the additional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one This icon indicates an invalid video clip Either you have to set the properties of this clip correctly via its context menu or provide the right video material on the video hard disks to receive a valid clip in the bin Multi clips are clips of either video or audio that are present in the bin as one clip but consist of se
321. th a set in and outpoint of the timeline the length of the currently selected range will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale TC BLA nana Ee timeline length 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 42 43 16 09 4045 OL E T in z 12 16 lYWOon a American_Beat Figure 6 32 Timeline length indicator Setting an In Outpoint To set an in outpoint perform the following e Move the timeline cursor via its controls or manually see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 25 to the position where the in outpoint should be set e Press the in or outpoint button EI An in outpoint can only be defined once If you set it anew i the previous one will be replaced To set an in or outpoint you may also use the entry fields to the right of the buttons The in outpoint will be set at this position The still selected part of the timeline will be displayed as usual whereas the deselected part is shown in a dimmed fashion in the video and audio tracks Furthermore in the timeline scale the selected part of the timeline will be marked with a blue line and the length of the timeline currently selected by the in and outpoint will be displayed by the length indicator right below the time line scale 6 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 30 1 09 00 m 112505 0 01 26 ee ee eee HOLLYWOOD oL Woon Figure 6 33 Timeline with set in and outpoint With a set in and
322. th the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information This way you can conform an offline composed project frame accurately Once the timeline cursor is correctly positioned use the snapping mode of CLIPSTER to add the required clip to the timeline at its supposed position see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 5 4 2 Setting In and Outpoint for the Clip from the Bin When the video or audio clip from the bin bin clip was dragged to the control area and the source edit mode is activated you can set the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately For this you have to use the scrub bar and the position items fHollyvrood HOLLYWOOD scrub bar __ _ 20 00 position items lete w 00 00 4 20 00 Figure 5 15 Bin clip in source edit mode 5 19 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DvS 5 20 The scrub bar provides a timeline of the clip coming from the bin You can use it and the position items to adjust the in and outpoint of the bin clip In detail you can find the following elements 7 The entry fields are connected to the selected display type of i the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline For example if source time code is selected as the display type and such a timecode is pro vided by the clip the bin clip s entry fields will provide the source timecode instead of a relative timeline timecode see section
323. the CLIPSTER Edit Tool simply select the tab Bin in the tool area to activate it Then the area will look similar to the following figure Bin Effects Markers Perform title bar e Fr folder area _____ contents area r button area ___ Figure 4 4 The bin With the bin you can perform a clip and project management by creat ing folders and sorting your video and audio material into them Fur thermore you can preview your material via thumbnails and select a preliminary inpoint for the respective clip For this the bin provides the following elements Most areas or items of the bin provide a context menu to make the various functions of the bin available to the user title bar With the title bar you can change the layout of the bin or sort your created folders present in the folder area folder area In the folder area you can create folders to sort and structure your video and audio material This way you can perform a clip and project management 4 4 The Tool Area contents area In the contents area you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails or text information If the thumbnail view is activated a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and to set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip is provid ed by a clip once it is selected You can administer the clips directly or add ne
324. the status bar inform you for instance about whether CLIPSTER is operating or whether the performance monitor is enabled and ready to measure the workload 4 5 4 The Drop Table As soon as drops occur during your real time operation entries will ap pear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected If the drop table is unavailable dimmed the performance monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIP STER Configurations user guide Type Timeline TC Figure 4 25 Drop table of performance monitor The entries provide information for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or if detected as well about the file that was the cause for this drop Drops are reported by the real time core of the CLIPSTER soft i ware In some cases it may not be able to provide information about the file name and or path You can retrieve further information about the location where the drop occurred by double clicking an entry in the drop table Then the time line cursor will jump to the approximate location where the drop hap pened and a timeline marker will be placed at this particular position of the timeline timeline marker Figure 4 26 Timeline marker in timeline 4 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Additional information about timeline markers can be found in section Marking Po
325. the white or black point of the clip s images High Adjusts the brighter parts of the clip i e the gain or white point By using this setting only the luminance changes the chroma settings remain as they were Values range from 100 to 100 Timeline Element Properties Low Adjusts the darker parts of the clip i e the lift or black point By using this setting only the luminance chang es the chroma settings remain as they were Values range from 100 to 100 With the Chroma items you can adjust color related settings such as the hue Hue Saturation 7 9 3 Global The hue setting moves the colors of the images around the color wheel in the HSL color space 180 It is recommended to use this setting lightly for small corrections only Adjustments greater than 10 usually produce dramatic color changes A color s saturation is its intensity A higher saturation will make the color to appear richer while a lower sat uration makes it look paler or in other words the sat uration is the proportion of grey in relation to the color s hue This setting can be set between 100 grey and 100 full saturation The Global items provide you with sliders for each color value R G and B as well as a master slider to adjust them all at once Hold Luma RGB 00 00 R 00 00 00 00 B 00 00 Figure 7 18 The global color settings Use the sliders R G or B to step up or down the color values o
326. timeline markers in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool For this perform the follow ing e Move the timeline cursor to the position where the timeline marker should be set e After this select the button MARK available in the user interface of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Alternatively you can also use the menu option Add Mark fi er on the context menu of the timeline scale This will add a marker to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool at the current position of the timeline cursor Once the marker is in place you can easily jump to it with the respective controls EEEE EE of the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and perform the task that you wanted to do at this position Furthermore you can view a list of all markers currently positioned in the timeline with the tab Markers of the tool area see section The Marker Table on page 4 35 6 49 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs timeline marker Figure 6 49 Timeline marker in timeline The timeline markers are also useful when drops occurred dur i ing a real time operation of CLIPSTER Then you can easily mark the locations of the drops with timeline markers via the performance monitor of CLIPSTER see section The Perfor mance Monitor on page 4 37 To delete a marker from the timeline jump with the timeline cursor to the respective timeline marker that you want to delete or place it man ually on its position and call up the cont
327. tion The Source Edit Mode on page 5 15 Afterwards you have the possibility at hand to transfer the selected im age or the complete image sequence to another application for fur ther processing with the menu option Export to Application on the context menu of the bin clip s video overlay see section Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip on page 5 22 To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 6 5 6 Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element The CLIPSTER Edit Tool provides two ways to export either the original source material or a copied version of it to a third party application of your choice You can export video data visible in the source edit mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool or you can export video data that is available in the timeline to another application This way you can process the source material of a video clip further and afterwards use it again in the CLIPSTER software without any difficulty This section describes how to 6 59 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 60 process source material when a video clip was already added to the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The export of source material that is visible in the source edit i mode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool is described in section Pro cessing the Source Material of a Video Clip on page 5 22 When a clip is present in a video track of the timeline area
328. to specify the storage path and file name to save the current default and video system settings As soon as your entries are confirmed with the button SAVE they will be saved to an extra file File extension cf CLIPSTER configuration file CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 32 After that you can load the contents of this file again into the CLIPSTER software see section Load defaults on page 8 31 which will change for example the default settings for each initialized new project as well as the system settings However some changes to the system settings will be in effect only after a restart of the software e Further information about the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool Li and its settings can be found in the CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide os PVs The Menus 8 6 The Help Menu You can get additional information about CLIPSTER via the menu op tion of the menu Help It contains the following menu options Figure 8 10 The Help menu They will be described in the following sections 8 6 1 About You can receive further information about the CLIPSTER software with the menu option About on the menu Help For example here you can find detailed version numbers of the individual software parts of CLIP STER 8 6 2 Manuals The online documentation of the CLIPSTER video system can be ac cessed via the menu option Manuals on the Help menu It opens an overview page in HT
329. tor provides the following elements chart The chart offers you a graphical interpretation of the measured workload of the system During a play out or record operation the processing workload will be shown via bars in the chart It is in detail ex plained in section The Chart on page 4 39 chart controls With the chart controls you can control the appear ance of the results in the chart or create a DVS pro prietary information file They are explained in section Chart Controls on page 4 41 status bar Right below the chart controls you can find the sta tus bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the performance monitor and the CLIPSTER software It is described in section The Status Bar on page 4 42 drop table As soon as drops occur during your real time opera tion entries will appear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected The entries pro vide information for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the cause for this drop You can find a descrip tion of the drop table in section The Drop Table on page 4 43 table controls Via the table controls you can either save the results shown in the drop table to a file or set markers in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool where the respec tive drop took place They are in detail explained in section The Table Controls on page 4 44 If the chart controls the d
330. tput on page 6 14 ii If you want to play out other audio chan Once everything is set as desired the rear of the CLIPSTER hardware provides the analog audio outputs where you can then monitor the au dio output 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File 6 18 With a three dimensional look up table 3D LUT file you can simulate the typical look of a projected motion picture film on a monitor con nected to the digital video interfaces of the CLIPSTER video system The CLIPSTER Edit Tool supports 3D look up tables from various suppliers such as ARRI or Kodak To apply a 3D LUT you have to load its file first and create a profile for it Afterwards the loaded 3D LUT file has to be enabled for the CLIPSTER software The 3D LUT support of the CLIPSTER software is an optional i feature Depending on the configuration of your CLIPSTER video system it may not be available PVs The Timeline Via the SETTINGS button you can access the items to load a 3D LUT file into the CLIPSTER Edit Tool It is lo cated at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items to load a 3D LUT file The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections see section Changing the Layout o
331. ttings see CLIPSTER Con i figurations user guide When a sequence processing is enabled each frame between a set in and outpoint of the timeline will be sent to the external application However this applies to a single clip only If the in and outpoint are set outside of the clip where the menu option Export to Application was called only the image sequence of the clip where the menu option was called will be sent If a non destructive export is selected for the external applications the source material of the clip will be copied to the same path and location where the original material is stored with an incrementing number add ed to the directory name of the clip lt name of clip s directo ry gt lt incrementing number gt After this the copied source material will be opened in the external application where you can pro cess it In the meantime the clip s representation in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be changed to the location of the copied mate rial i e a new bin clip will be added to the bin of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool and the representation of the clip in the video track of the timeline will be changed to its new bin clip and location As soon as you have pro cessed the material with the other application and saved it you can use it immediately in CLIPSTER without having overwritten the original source its original bin clip is still present in the bin When a destructive export is selected for th
332. ttings will only be adjusted if the preset effect is of the i same type as the effect selected from the effects list of the timeline element properties 4 3 3 Administration of Preset Effects To facilitate your work with preset effects they can be administered in any way For example they can be renamed or deleted as well as saved or loaded This section explains the various possibilities to administer preset effects Most of these tasks require the use of the context menus available in the effects pane usually invoked with a right click of the mouse How ever there are two different context menus available One that can be called on the preset effects directly and one that is available only below the effects folders or to the far right side of the effects pane CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 32 Figure 4 19 The two context menus of the effects pane Renaming Preset Effects To rename a preset effect and thus to give it a different name once it was created in the effects pane perform the following e Call up the context menu on the respective preset effect and select the menu option Rename Alternatively you may click on a preset effect a second time i with the mouse After this you can change the name of the effect e Enter the new name of the preset effect via the keyboard and con firm it with the Enter key Then the selected effect will be given the new name Only preset effects can be rename
333. ty of the video track with the highest number over all others when enabled CLIPSTER is able to autoconform offline composed projects into different video tracks via the CLIPSTER I O Tool see CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide for more information Thus with the help of the vertical editing feature of CLIPSTER you can compare different versions of conformed projects easily in the timeline For an even better control of the conformed mas ter you can add the offline version of the project to a different video track 6 63 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 6 Working with Audio Clips With audio clips it is the same as with video clips The CLIPSTER Edit Tool works with representations of clips in the timeline only Through out your work in the Edit Tool the original material on the video hard disks is maintained and never altered The timeline area may contain up to 16 audio tracks where you can add audio clips in the desired sequence set fade ins and outs and control the volume of each clip The number of audio tracks displayed in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool li can be set freely see section Video and Audio Track Proper ties on page 6 7 To get a proper output you have to configure the audio hard ware output accordingly see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 14 CLIPSTER supports audio files with multiple mono or stereo channels If you drag such a clip from the bin to the timeline t
334. udio clips provide various information via tooltips These infor mation will be displayed as soon as the mouse cursor is placed over a clip el Livwnn aiaa aes Clip Name Hollywood Resolution 1920 x 1080 pixel Start End Length Figure 6 11 Tooltip of video clip Then you can see for example the file name of the clip or its in and outpoint on the timeline The information displayed via the tooltips can be adjusted freely to your individual needs with the Configuration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more in formation Additionally you have the possibility to turn on or off the tooltips of the clips in the timeline For this call up the context menu on either a video or an audio clip usually invoked with a right click of the mouse and select the menu option Enable tooltip see also section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 54 or section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 65 for further information Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide iJ The tooltips can also be enabled or disabled via the CLIPSTER for more information 6 2 5 Changing the Display Type To the right of the thumbnails combo box you can find the display type combo box where you can set the way the position information is dis played by the clips in the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool The position information of each clip are shown for example in the
335. ur video hard disk array via thumbnails and in still images Additionally you can see the properties of the clips via text information The look and usage of the Content Browser resembles the bin of the CLIPSTER software Once activated with the button CONTENT available in the task bar of the CLIPSTER software it will be visible instead of the timeline area right below the tool and control area In its left pane you can select the hard disk drives and directories All connected drives in a network can be searched and displayed Once a directory that contains clips is selected they will be shown in the right pane of the Content Browser as thumbnails with text information be scanned for contents otherwise no video material will be displayed by this module For this you have to use the DVS Content Scanner running in the background of your video sys tem and accessible via an icon in the system tray of the Win dows desktop i Prior to using the Content Browser the video storage s have to By default multi clips are registered by the Content Browser as one clip and will therefore provide a single thumbnail per multi clip only The clips available in the right pane of the Content Browser can be dragged and dropped into the contents area of the bin CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs VihdiAmerican_Beauty Pant02 American Beauty Part02 05d yuv Figure 4 9 Drag and drop of clip to bin from the Content Browser
336. ut the menu option Open can be found in section Open on page 8 4 You can adjust the inserting of projects to your liking with the i Configuration Tool of the CLIPSTER software see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more details There you can for instance adjust the name of the bin subfolder where the bin clips will be added 8 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS 8 2 5 Save Ctri S With the menu option Save you can save the currently opened project file If the edited project file was a new one a dialog window opens where you have to specify the storage path and file name for the project Project files are by default stored with the file extensions cp or cp autosaveif it is saved via the autosave function see CLIP STER Configurations user guide for more details Furthermore during the saving procedure the old project file is saved as an additional back up file with the file extension backup cp File extensions cp CLIPSTER project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file If a file name is already assigned to the currently opened project this menu option will immediately save the project under the assigned name In the project file the bin and the clips of the timeline including all op erators will be saved Additionally a lot of settings will be saved within the project file as well for example
337. veral indi vidual clips on the video hard disk array Usually these individual clips are stored in a subdirectory each and all subdirectories are located under one main directory When adding a multi clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 8 you may select the main directory as a clip and add it to the bin All individual clips will then be available as one clip in the bin Even when dragged to the timeline the multi clip is handled as one clip By default multi clips are registered by the Con i tent Browser as one clip and will therefore pro vide a single thumbnail per multi clip only The Tool Area However the CLIPSTER software needs several param eters to recognize a clip as a multi clip Because of this only the CLIPSTER software is capable of creating a valid multi clip for example during the finalization of a project see section Finalize on page 8 11 or when recording a clip with the CLIPSTER I O Tool Then when the clip provides more than 20 000 frames the CLIPSTER software will divide the single clip into several subdirectories under one main directory This main di rectory can be added to the bin as a multi clip Further information about the finalization process and the stor ing of a clip with more than 20 000 frames can be found in section Finalize on page 8 11 When you add an audio mult
338. video system or may be of help during service and maintenance tasks e g monitoring and error diagnostics of the CLIPSTER hard and software For instance among them you can find the defragmentation tool of CLIPSTER which is a process automatically started with the CLIPSTER software and running in the background of the system During stand still times of CLIPSTER the defragmentation tool will reorganize the files present on the hard disk array for an optimized performance of real time tasks such as a play out or record Among the tools it is the only process that runs in the system s background Most other tools delivered with the CLIPSTER software are used during the initial configuration and setup of the CLIPSTER video system only In your daily work with CLIPSTER they are of no use 27 Further information about the tools in general can be found in i the CLIPSTER Tools and Services user guide accessible via the PDF files of the software s online help For additional infor mation about the defragmentation process in particular please refer to section The Automatic Defragmentation Process on page A 12 Basics Plug Ins Operators In addition to the CLIPSTER software and its modules there are plug ins operators available via the special and easy to use plug in interface of CLIPSTER These operators can be accessed as timeline element prop erties of clips and offer additional editing features for your video pr
339. w clips to the bin with the help of the context menu of the contents area Via the context menu of a clip you can also create a proxy from it in case its video format exceeds the real time capability of CLIPSTER view buttons Via the view buttons of the bin you can select whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text informa tion only This section explains all features provided by the bin of the CLIPSTER software in detail 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin With the bin you can perform a clip and project management You can structure the clips by sorting them to different folders and you can pre view the clips as well as access additional information via their text dis play in the bin To serve all these functions at once you can change and configure the layout of the bin freely The areas of the bin can be arranged horizontally or vertically The appearance of clips in the contents area can be changed Both procedures are explained in this section Changing the Layout of the Bin To provide for example for a better view on the material in the bin the areas of the bin the folder and the contents area can be arranged hor izontally or vertically via the title bar of the folder area For this do the following e Call up the context menu of the bin s title bar usually with a right click of the mouse 4 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 6 x Vertical
340. w the timeline area Via the properties you can for example adjust zooming and panning or set color gamma corrections for the respective clip This is in more detail described in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 When a clip is present in a video track of the time line area you can process its source material with a third party application of your choice either by us ing the original data directly destructive export or by previously copying the material beforehand Af terwards it will be provided again in the CLIPSTER software for further usage More information about this can be found in section Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element on page 6 59 6 55 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Select all With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 36 Cut Using these menu options all timeline elements can Copy be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location Paste of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 22 6 5 3 Consistencies of Clips 6 56 During the loading of a project file or the import of a bin see section Open on page 8 4 and section Import Bin on page 8 24 video cli
341. w to perform some basic editing tasks zn More detailed information about individual items or steps de i scribed here can be found in the chapters four to eight of this user guide The chapter will be concluded with a description how to shut down the program CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 1 Starting the Program 3 2 This section provides you with a description how to get the CLIPSTER Edit Tool started To start the program you have to do the following e Select from the START button menu of Windows on the submenu DVS the entry for the CLIPSTER software for example All Programs DVS DVS Clipster Alternatively you may also start the program via the CLIPSTER icon on the desktop of Windows This will load the CLIPSTER software by DVS As the starting user inter face the CLIPSTER Edit Tool will be started automatically iJ Because the CLIPSTER software is designed to run in full screen mode to provide for an undistracted view on the video material and the editing task at hand the following shortcuts may be helpful To open the Windows Explorer Windows 44 El To open the Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del To switch to the Windows Windows a D desktop To switch to another program Alt TAB To minimize the user interface for example to access other programs you may also use the Minimize menu option of the CLIPSTER icon on the menu bar see section Minimize on page 8 2
342. will be requested_dvsinfo_ lt system time gt txt with the lt system time gt added in the format vyyy mm dd_hh mm ss It will be stored in the subfolder dvsinfo in the log directory under the CLIPSTER software s installation path default C Program Files DVS Clipster log dvs info DVS information file without request ed_ in front of the file name is as a stan dard written to the stated location automatically i When exiting the CLIPSTER software a Only the last ten DVS information files will be stored If necessary the oldest log file will be deleted The button RESET enables you to reset the indica tion about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time at the top right side of the chart back to zero After wards you may start a new evaluation of the real time performance of the CLIPSTER software which in turn may report new drops in the table e This button does not reset the drop table i of the performance monitor For this you have to use the button CLEAR of the table controls see section The Table Controls on page 4 44 4 5 3 The Status Bar Right below the chart controls you can find the status bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the perfor mance monitor and the CLIPSTER software Clipster is operating Figure 4 24 Status message in the status bar 4 42 PVs The Tool Area The messages in
343. window to export an EDL provides you with items to specify the timecode as it will occur in the EDL further For this use the settings items as described below Timecode This combo box determines the type of timecode that should be used for the creation of the EDL You can set that either the internal timecode of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool s timeline should be used In ternal or the source timecode provided by the header of the files Source TC In case the clips in the timeline are configured to show a virtual source timecode this timecode will be taken when Source TC is selected Further information about source timecode can be found in section Notes on Source Timecode on page 2 15 8 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Source Offset Destination Offset With this entry field you can define an offset for the clips in and outpoints the in and outpoints within their respective source material i e you can adjust and relocate their trim points Enter the respective offset in timecode format With this entry field you can set an offset for the clips destination within the created EDL timeline If the timeline of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool already pro vides a timeline offset this will be added to the destination offset Enter the respective offset in timecode format Detailing Additional Options The area Options provides additional items to determine the creation of the EDL Use them as indicated below whe
344. write mode activated add a clip from the bin to the time line or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the insertion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of clip no 1 is over written When moving or adding clips in the timeline with the overwrite mode activated gaps may occur in the timeline no contents to output in this part of the timeline Further information about gaps and how to close them can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 6 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 4 2 Muting and Locking Tracks 6 34 master mute lock gt Se The video and audio tracks of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool can be muted and or locked independently i e they can be enabled or disabled for a play out as well as for any editing work If a track is muted its contents will not be played out if it is locked no editing work such as a cutting of clips can be performed in this track To lock or mute a track you have to use the buttons available in the ar eas right in front of the tracks The button M mutes the track bar it from an output while the button L locks it bar it from an editing work Timeline lock button Figure 6 34 Buttons to lock and mute tracks With the M and L buttons to the left side of the timeline scale you can mute and lock all video and audi
345. xample the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the cause for this drop If the performance mon itor is disabled the log file will be written but it will provide no informa tion about drops that occurred lt Drops are reported by the real time core of the CLIPSTER soft i ware In some cases it may not be able to provide information about the file name and or path Only the last ten reports will be stored If required the oldest log file will be deleted Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im age files that are not present on the hard disk array at all will not cause the performance monitor to show a drop However you can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 8 25 and section Consistencies of Clips on page 6 56 You can retrieve the location of the file where the drop oc curred also by setting timeline markers with the help of the drop table or its controls see section The Drop Table on page 4 43 and section The Table Controls on page 4 44 This section explains the basic usage of and the items provided by the performance monitor 4 5 1 The Chart The chart of the performance monitor provides a graphical representa tion of the measured workload of the system During play out or record operations the workload will be displayed via bars in the chart
346. y But for instance in case you want to realize a tempo rary cutaway or to evaluate the visual outcome of different shots at a particular position in the timeline simply place the respective timeline elements in another track in the timeline The higher the track number the more priority is given to the respective track during a play out Then with the help of enabling and disabling the respective tracks button M see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 34 you can easily determine the best possible solution for your work Example 1 In the example below the timeline is configured to three video tracks All three tracks are enabled not muted i e all tracks will be played out Track3 M Track1 M When a play out is initiated the result will be that clip 3 overlays all others below it i e the ones with a lower priority The Timeline Example 2 In the second example the third track is now disabled muted Track1 M When a play out is initiated this will lead to an output where clip 3 is not given out at all while the clips 2 and 4 overlay the clip 1 present in the first video track the one with the lowest priority The display of the video tracks can be reversed via the Config uration Tool of CLIPSTER see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information However this does not affect the play out priority i e the priori
347. y also set transitions i and or apply effects to the clip s in the timeline as long as they are not a subject to a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 e After this select the tab Perform in the tool area of the CLIPSTER software The tool area switches to the performance tool of the CLIPSTER soft ware performance monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more informa tion G If the controls of the performance monitor appear dimmed the S The Tool Area Bin Effects Markers Perform Update q DVSInto Reset Ready Date ype Timeline TC Frame File H Mark All Clear Figure 4 27 The performance monitor After this the performance monitor is ready to assess the performance workload Measuring the Performance Once the performance monitor and the software are prepared as de scribed in section Preparing the Software and the Performance Mon itor on page 4 46 you can begin the assessment of the workload e Start the play out operation of the material added to the timeline with the play button available in the control area of the CLIPSTER Edit Tool see section Controls on page 5 11 This will start the play out of the video material added to the timeline and as soon as the play out starts the performance monitor wi
348. yed on the screen PVs The Timeline At the bottom of this window you can find further optional settings in the Options area In the middle you can find the settings to crop the video output The other items available in the Options area are explained in their respective sections see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Further Audio Con figurations on page 6 17 and section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 cropping options Cropping 3D LUT Audio Secrubbin e Monitorin g Figure 6 21 Items to crop the timeline With these items you can adjust and crop the output image for exam ple to add black bars to your video output A click on the button CROP PING opens the following settings window 4 Timeline cropping Figure 6 22 Window to crop the video output All cropping settings configured in this window will appear at the video output of CLIPSTER as well However this is tempo rary and for monitoring reasons only To apply the settings to the timeline the cropping has to be activated with the check box Cropping in the Options area of the Output settings window see below At the top left of the Timeline cropping window you can find items to control the aspect ratio of the cropped image 6 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Output 1 78 1 HD 1920 x 1080 Aspect ratio 2986 Hold aspect ratio
349. you the down converted material when it is deactivated the original high res olution material is used in the CLIPSTER Edit Tool To activate or deactivate a proxy perform the following e Inthe bin call up the context menu on the clip that provides a proxy and select the menu option Activate proxy If this menu option shows a cross in front after it was clicked the proxy is activated and will be used for the selected clip The bin clip is now The Tool Area configured to the proxy as its source and the properties of this clip will detail this accordingly In case the menu option does not show the cross in front the proxy is deactivated Then the original material will be used for the bin clip and its representations in the timeline The properties of this clip will detail this accordingly You can also use the menu options Activate all proxies or i Deactivate all proxies on the Bin menu to activate or deac tivate all proxies in the bin in one step see section Activate all proxies on page 8 27 and section Deactivate all proxies on page 8 28 Deleting a Proxy Once you are finished with your editing work using the proxies you may want to dispose of them i e delete them from the video hard disk array e In the bin call up the context menu on the clip whose proxy you want to delete and select the menu option Delete proxy In case you want to delete all proxies available for the cur i rent project in
350. ystem as well it provides comparatively more settings than the project related ones Use the de fault settings in case you want to change the video system settings or the default values for each initialized new project The settings of the tab Project will be stored together with the current project in the project file only and are therefore just temporarily available as long as this particular project is not closed The Project config menu option on the menu Options enables you to configure and set up the project related settings of CLIPSTER It will open the CLIPSTER Configuration Tool with the tab Project activated Then you can configure for example the paths for the temporary data as well as other project specific settings such as the appearances of clips in the bin All changes performed on this tab will be saved together with the project file For more information and a complete description of the CLIPSTER Con figuration Tool please consult the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 8 5 3 Defaults Defaults 8 30 The CLIPSTER Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings one for project related settings tab Project and one for default settings that will be used for the video system in general as well as for each new project tab Default well as about the project related settings can be found in sec i Further information about the two configuration groupings as tion Project config
351. ze play out frequency location of the clip on the storage etc Those elements that exceed the real time capability of the CLIPSTER video system will be subject to a prerendering Fact is the greater the resolution of the material in the timeline the more likely the chance that a prerendering is required Then CLIPSTER will not be able to handle the respective clip or operator in real time ments i e clips as well as operators e g transitions If any ex ceed the real time capability of CLIPSTER they will be marked for a prerendering Further information about the real time ca pability of clips can be found in section Real time Capability of Clips on page 4 15 and section Unlicensed Hard Disks on page 4 17 iJ A prerendering may be indicated for all types of timeline ele The prerendering of timeline elements means that the CLIPSTER Edit Tool calculates the timeline elements before a play out takes place and stores the calculated extra files images in a temporary location on the The Timeline video hard disk array These are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline It is best to handle and administer the temporary data project specific meaning for each project in a different temporary stor age location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 A part of the timeline that has to be prerendered before a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Bilingual  Philips AV cable for portable DVD player CRP270  APC Back-UPS 800  Acer Aspire C-105-MO10  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file